I  LIBRARY 

1  OF  THE 

University  of  California, 


GIFT    OF 


Class  —    /Yjf~^M  y 

-^ : 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE 


BEING  A  COMPILATION  OF  THE  TYPOGRAPHICAL  RULES 
IN  FORCE  AT  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO   PRESS 


TO  WHICH  ARE   APPENDED 

SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


B 


'I    » 

)     5   >  ,  ^    '    '    ' 


o         •»    • 

>       >        , 


I     I"-''      ^       -      ^- 


■>      *  5 


>      o      >    .    •      »         >• 


?       ''.^      ^      -.^ 


CHICAGO 
THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

1906 


ZZS'2> 


Copyright  1906  By 
The  University  of  Chicago 


Published  November  1906 


Composed  and  Printed  By 

The  University  of  Chicago  Press 

Chicago,  Illinois,  U.  S.  A. 


m 


PREFACE 

The  present  work  is  a  codification  of  the  typographical 
rules  and  practices  in  force  at  the  University  of  Chicago 
Press.  Having  its  genesis,  more  than  a  decade  ago,  in  a 
single  sheet  of  fundamentals,  jotted  down  at  odd  moments 
for  the  individual  guidance  of  the  first  proofreader ;  added 
to  from  year  to  year,  as  opportunity  would  offer  or  new 
necessities  arise;  revised  and  re-revised  as  the  scope  of 
the  work,  and,  it  is  hoped,  the  wisdom  of  the  workers, 
increased — it  emerges  in  its  present  form  as  the  embodi- 
ment of  traditions,  the  crystalHzation  of  usages,  the  blended 
product  of  the  reflections  of  many  minds. 

Rules  and  regulations  such  as  these,  in  the  nature  of 
the  case,  cannot  be  endowed  with  the  fixity  of  rock-ribbed 
law.  They  are  meant  for  the  average  case,  and  must  be 
applied  with  a  certain  degree  of  elasticity.  Exceptions 
will  constantly  occur,  and  ample  room  is  left  for  individual 
initiative  and  discretion.  They  point  the  way  and  survey 
the  road,  rather  than  remove  the  obstacles.  Throughout 
this  book  it  is  assumed  that  no  regulation  contained  therein 
is  absolutely  inviolable.  Wherever  the  peculiar  nature  of 
the  subject-matter,  the  desirabiUty  of  throwing  into  relief 
a  certain  part  of  the  argument,  the  reasonable  preference 
of  a  writer,  or  a  typographical  contingency  suggests  a 
deviation,  such  deviation  may  legitimately  be  made.  Each 
case  of  this  character  must  largely  be  decided  upon  its 


234226 


own  merits.  Generally  it  may  be  stated  that,  where  no 
question  of  good  taste  or  good  logic  is  involved,  defer- 
ence should  be  shown  to  the  expressed  wishes  of  the 
author. 

The  nature  of  the  work  of  The  Press  itself — and  this 
will  apply,  to  a  greater  or  less  extent,  to  any  similar  in- 
stitution affected  by  local  conditions — constantly  calls  for 
modification,  now  of  this  rule,  now  of  that.  It  would  be 
found  impracticable,  even  were  it  desirable,  to  bring  all 
of  its  publications  into  rigid  uniformity  of  ''style"  and 
appearance.  Methods  have  been  devised,  systems  evolved, 
in  certain  lines  of  work,  which  cannot  bodily  be  carried 
over  into  the  field  of  others.  Thus,  in  the  matter  of  literary 
references,  for  instance,  general  practice  has  estabhshed 
certain  usages  in  some  of  the  sciences  which  it  would  not 
be  advisable  to  ignore.  Similar  discrepancies  may  be  ob- 
served in  other  directions.  •  These  deviations  will  be  found 
mentioned  at  the  appropriate  places  in  the  body  of  the 
book.  On  the  whole,  however,  the  rules  are  designed  to 
govern  all  publications  sent  forth  with  the  imprint  of  this 
Press. 

Concerning  the  character  and  contents  of  the  book 
Httle  need  be  added.  Its  origin,  its  primary  aim,  and  its 
limitations,  as  outlined  above,  will  suggest  the  bounds  of 
its  usefulness.  It  does  not  pretend  to  be  exhaustive;  a 
few  things  must  be  taken  for  granted,  and  the  traditional 
territory  of  the  dictionary  has  only  exceptionally  been  in- 
vaded. It  does  not  presume  to  be  inflexibly  consistent; 
applicability,  in  the  printing-office,  is  a  better  test  than 
iron-clad  consistency,  and  common-sense  a  safer  guide 

vi 


than  abstract  logic.  It  lays  no  claim  to  perfection  in  any 
of  its  parts;  bearing  throughout  the  inevitable  earmarks 
of  compromise,  it  will  not  carry  conviction  at  every  point 
to  everybody.  Neither  is  it  an  advocate  of  any  radical 
scheme  of  reform;  in  the  present  state  of  the  agitation  for 
the  improvement  of  spelhng,  progressive  conservatism  has 
been  thought  to  be  more  appropriate  for  an  academic 
printing-office  than  radicalism.  As  it  stands,  this  Manual 
is  believed  to  contain  a  fairly  comprehensive,  reasonably 
harmonious,  and  wholesomely  practical  set  of  work-rules 
for  the  aid  of  those  whose  duties  bring  them  into  direct 
contact  with  the  Manufacturing  Department  of  The  Press. 
If,  in  addition  to  this  its  main  object,  this  Manual  oj  Style 
may  incidentally  prove  helpful  to  other  gropers  in  the 
labyrinths  of  typographical  style,  its  purpose  will  have 
been  abundantly  realized. 

August  15,  1906 


vu 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Rules  for  Composition i 

Capitalization 3 

The  Use  of  Italics 21 

Quotations 25 

Spelling T     ...  29 

Punctuation 39 

Divisions .68^ 

Footnotes 71 

Tabular  Work 74 

Technical  Terms 79 

Appendix 93 

Hints  to  Authors  and  Editors 95 

Hints  to  Proofreaders 99 

Hints  to  Copyholders 103 

Proofreader's  Marks 106 

Index 107 

Specimens  of  Types  in  Use 123 


IX 


RULES  FOR  COMPOSITION 


CAPITALIZATION 

Capitalize — 

1.  Proper  nouns  and  adjectives: 

George,  America,  Englishman;  Elizabethan,  French  (see  46). 

2.  Generic  terms  forming  a  part  of  geographical  names: 

Atlantic  Ocean,  Dead  Sea,  Baffin's  Bay,  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
Strait  of  Gibraltar,  Straits  Settlements,  Mississippi  River, 
Three  Rivers,  Laughing  Brook,  Rocky  Mountains,  Blue 
Hills,  Pike's  Peak,  Mount  of  Olives,  Great  Desert,  Death 
Valley,  Prince  Edward  Island,  Sea  (Lake)  of  Galilee. 

But  do  not  capitalize  words  of  this  class  when  simply 

added,  by  way  of  description,  to  the  specific  name, 

without  forming  an  organic  part  of  such  name: 

the  river  Elbe,  the  desert  of  Sahara,  the  island  of  Madagascar. 

3.  Adjectives  and  nouns,  used  singly  or  in  conjunction, 

to  distinguish  definite  regions  or  parts  of  the  world : 

Old  World,  Western  Hemisphere,  North  Pole,  Equator, 
the  North  (  =  Scandinavia),  the  Far  East,  Orient,  Levant;  the 
North,  South,  East,  West  (United  States). 

But  do  not,  as  a  rule,  capitalize  adjectives  derived 
from  such  names,  even  if  used  substantively;  nor 
nouns  simply  designating  direction  or  point  of  com- 
pass: 

oriental  customs,  the  orientals,  southern  states,  a  southerner 
(but:  Northman  =  Scandinavian) ;  an  invasion  of  barbarians 
from  the  north,  traveling  through  the  south  of  Europe. 

3 


The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

4.  Generic  terms  for  political  divisions:  (i)  when  the 
term  is  an  organic  part  of  the  name,  following  the 
proper  name  directly;  (2)  when,  with  the  preposition 
*'of,"  it  is  used  in  direct  connection  with  the  proper 
name  to  indicate  certain  minor  administrative  sub- 
divisions in  the  United  States;  (3)  when  used  singly 
as  the  accepted  designation  for  a  specific  division; 
(4)  when  it  is  part  of  a  fanciful  or  popular  appel- 
lation used  as  if  a  real  geographical  name : 

(i)  Holy  Roman  Empire,  German  Empire  {=Deutsches 
Reich),  French  Republic  {—Republique  Frangaise),  United 
Kingdom,  Northwest  Territory,  Cook  County,  Evanston 
Township,  Kansas  City  (New  York  City — exception);  (2) 
Department  of  the  Lakes,  Town  of  Lake,  Borough  of  Man- 
hattan; (3)  the  Union,  the  States,  the  Republic  (= United 
States),  [the  Confederacy],  the  Dominion  (  =  Canada);  (4) 
Celestial  Empire  (Celestials),  Holy  (Promised)  Land,  Badger 
State,  Eternal  City,  Garden  City. 

But  do  not  (with  the  exceptions  noted)  capitaHze  such 

terms  when  standing   alone,  nor  when,  with  *'of," 

preceding  the  specific  name : 

the  empire,  the  state;  empire  of  Russia,  kingdom  of  Bel- 
gium, [kingdom  of  God,  or  of  heaven],  duchy  of  Anhalt, 
state  of  Illinois,  county  of  Cook,  city  of  Chicago. 

5.  Numbered  political  divisions: 

Eleventh  Congressional  District,  First  Ward,  Second  Precinct. 

6.  The  names  of  thoroughfares,  parks,  squares,  blocks, 
buildings,  etc.: 


Manual  oj  Style:    Capitalization  5 

Drexel  Avenue,  Ringstrasse,  Via  Appia,  Chicago  Drainage 
Canal;  Lincoln  Park;  Trafalgar  Square ;  Monadnock  Block ; 
Lakeside  Building,  Capitol,  White  House,  County  Hospital, 
Boston  Public  Library,  New  York  Post-Office,  British 
Museum,  Theatre  Franfais,  Lexington  Hotel,  Masonic  Temple, 
[Solomon's  temple,  but,  when  standing  alone:  the  Temple]. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  general  designations  of 
buildings  as  "courthouse,"  "post-office,"  "library," 
etc.,  except  in  connection  with  the  name  of  the  place 
in  which  they  are  located. 

7.  The  names  of  poHtical  parties,  religious  denomina- 
tions or  sects,  and  philosophical,  literary,  and  artistic 
schools,  and  their  adherents : 

Republican,  Conservative,  National  Liberal,  Social  Democ- 
racy (where,  as  in  continental  Europe,  it  is  organized  as 
a  distinct  parliamentary  faction);  Christian,  Protestantism, 
Evangelical  Lutheran,  Cathohc  (Papist,  Ultramontane),  Re- 
formed, Greek  Orthodox,  Methodism,  Anabaptist,  Seventh- 
Day  Adventists,  the  Establishment,  High  Church  (High 
Churchman),  Christian  Science,  Theosophist,  Jew  (but:  gen- 
tile), Pharisee  (but:  scribe);  Epicurean,  Stoic,  Gnosticism, 
Neoplatonism,  Literalist;  the  Romantic  movement;  the  Sym- 
bolic school  of  painters. 

But  do  not  capitaUze  any  of  the  above  or  similar 
words,  or  their  derivatives,  when  used  in  their  origi- 
nal or  acquired  general  sense  of  pervading  spirit, 
point  of  view,  trend  of  thought,  attitude  of  mind,  or 
mode  of  action : 

republican  form  of  government,  a  true  democrat  and  a  con- 
servative statesman,  socialism  as  an  economic  panacea,  the 


)  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

communistic  theory,  single-taxer,  anarchism;  catholicity  of 
mind,  puritanical  ideas,  evangelical  spirit,  nonconformist, 
dissenter;  pharisaic  superciliousness;  deist,  pantheism,  ra- 
tionalist; epicurean  tastes,  stoic  endurance,  dualism  and 
monism  in  present-day  philosophy,  an  altruistic  world- view; 
the  classics,  a  realistic  novel. 

8.  The  names  of  monastic  orders  and  their  members: 
Black  Friars,  Dominican,  Jesuitism. 

9.  The  proper  (official)  titles  of  social,  religious,  educa- 
tional, political,  commercial,  and  industrial  organiza- 
tions and  institutions: 

Union  League  Club,  Knights  Templar;  Young  People's  f 
Society  of  Christian  Endeavor,  Associated  Charities;  Smith- 
sonian Institution,  State  University  of  Iowa,  Hyde  Park  High 
School;  the  Commercial  Academy  (Handelsakademie)  of 
Leipzig,  the  Paris  Lyceum  (Lycee  de  Paris);  [the  forty  Im- 
mortals]; Civic  Federation,  Cook  County  Democracy,  Tam- 
many Hall;  Associated  Press,  Typographical  Union  No.  16; 
The  Macmillan  Company,  Chicago,  Milwaukee  &  St.  Paul 
Railroad. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  generic  terms  when  used    1 

to  designate  a  class;  nor  when  standing  alone,  even 

if  applied  to  a  specific  institution,  except  to  avoid 

ambiguity: 

young  people's  societies,  the  high  school  at  Lemont,  local     ^ 
typographical  unions;  the  club,  the  association,  the  company; 
but:  "He  joined  the  Hall  [Tammany],"  "a  member  of  the 
[French]   Academy;"     "The   University   announces  .  .  .  ." 
(see  42). 

10.   The  names  of  legislative,  judiciary,  and  administra- 


Manual  oj  Style:    Capitalization  7 

tive  bodies  and  governmental  departments,  and  their 
branches,  when  specifically  apphed: 

Congress  (Senate,  House  of  Representatives  [the  House], 
Committee  of  Ways  and  Means),  Parliament  (House  of 
Lords,  House  of  Commons),  Reichstag,  Chamber  of  Deputies 
(the  Chamber),  General  Assembly  of  Illinois,  Chicago  City 
Council,  Board  of  Aldermen,  South  Park  Commissioners; 
Supreme  Court  of  the  United  States,  Circuit  Court  of  Cook 
County,  [Sanhedrin];  Department  of  the  Interior,  Census 
Office,  Springfield  Board  of  Education,  Department  of  Pub- 
lic Works. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  general,  paraphrastic,  or 

incomplete  designations  as — 

the  national  assembly,  the  legislature  of  the  state,  the  upper 
house  of  Congress,  the  German  federal  parliament,  the 
Dutch  diet;  the  council,  the  department,  the  board. 

11.  Ordinals    used    to    designate    Egyptian   dynasties, 

sessions  of  Congress,  names  of  regiments,  and   in 

similar  connections: 

the  Eighteenth  Dynasty,  the  Fifty-third  Congress,  the  Second 
Illinois  Regiment  Band. 

12.  Commonly    accepted     appellations     for     historical 

epochs,    periods   in   the   history   of   a   language  or 

literature,  and  geological  ages  and  strata: 

Stone  Age,  Middle  Ages,  Crusades,  Renaissance,  Reforma- 
tion, Inquisition,  Commonwealth  (Cromwell's),  Commune 
«  (Paris);  Old  English  (OE — see  no),  Middle  High  German 
(MHG),  the  Age  of  Elizabeth;  Pleistocene,  Silurian,  Lower 
Carboniferous. 


8  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

13.  Names  for  important  events: 

Thirty  Years'  War,  Peasants'  War  (German),  Revolution 
(French),  Revolutionary  War  or  War  of  Independence 
(American),  Whiskey  Insurrection  (American),  Civil  War 
(American),  War  of  181 2,  Franco -Prussian  War,  Battle  of 
Gettysburg;  Peace  of  Utrecht,  Louisiana  Purchase. 

14.  Political  alliances,  and  such  terms  from  secular  or 
ecclesiastical  history  as  have,  through  their  associa- 
tions, acquired  special  significance  as  designations 
for  parties,  classes,  movements,  etc.  (see  7) : 
Protestant  League,  Holy  Alliance,  Dreibund;  the  Roses,  the 
Roundheads,  Independents,  Independency  (English  history). 

15.  Conventions,  congresses,  expositions,  etc.: 

Council  of  Nicaea,  Parliament  of  Religions,  Fifteenth  Inter- 
national Congress  of  Criminology,  Westminster  Assembly, 
Chicago  World's  Fair,  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition, 

16.  Titlesof  specific  treaties,  acts,  laws  (juridical),  bills,  etc. : 
Treaty  of  Verdun,  Art.  V  of  the  Peace  of  Prague,  Edict  of 
Nantes,  Concordat,  the  Constitution  (of  the  United  States, 
when  standing  alone,  or  when  referred  to  as  a  literary 
document).  Declaration  of  Independence,  Act  of  Emancipa- 
tion, Magna  Charta,  Corn  Law,  Reform  Bill  (Enghsh). 

17.  Creeds  and  confessions  of  faith: 

Apostles'  Creed,  Augsburg  Confession,  Thirty-nine  Articles; 
[the  Golden  Rule]. 

18.  Civic  and  ecclesiastical  feast-days: 

Fourth  of  July  (the  Fourth),  Labor  Day,  Thanksgiving  Day; 
Easter,  Passover,  Feast  of  Tabernacles,  New  Year's  Day 
[but:  sabbath = day  of  rest]. 


Manual  oj  Style:    Capitalization  9 

19.  Titles,  civil  and  military,  preceding  the  name,  and 
academic  degrees,  in  abbreviated  form,  following 
the  name;  all  titles  of  nobihty,  purely  honorary, 
v^hen  referring  to  specific  persons,  with  or  without 
the  name  attached;  famihar  names  applied  to  par- 
ticular persons;  orders  (decorations)  and  the -titles 
accompanying  them;  titles,  without  the  name,  used 
in  direct  address;  and  the  words  'Tresident,"  "Czar" 
("Tsar"),  "Kaiser,"  "Sultan,"  and  "Pope,"  stand- 
ing alone,  w^hen  referring  to  the  president  of  the 
United  States,  the  emperor  of  Russia,  the  emperor 
of  Germany,  the  sultan  of  Turkey,  and  the  pope 
at  Rome: 

Queen  Victoria,  ex-President  Cleveland,  Rear-Admiral  Dewey, 
United  States  Commissioner  of  Education  Harris,  Dr.  Davis; 
Timothy  D wight,  D.D.,  LL.D.;  the  Prince  of  Wales,  the 
Marquis  of  Lome,  His  Majesty,  His  Grace;  the  Apostle 
to  the  Gentiles,  "the  Father  of  his  Country;"  order  of  the 
Red  Eagle,  Knight  Commander  of  the  Bath;  "Allow 
me  to  suggest,  Judge  ....;"  "The  President  [of  the 
United  States]  was  chosen  arbitrator,"  "the  Kaiser's 
^loroccan  policy,"  "the  Pope's  attitude  toward  the  French 
Republic." 

But  do  not  capitaHze  the  titles  of  occupants  of  actu- 
ally existing  offices,  when  following  the  name  (see 
42);  when  standing  alone,  without  name  (with  the 
exceptions  noted  above,  and  see  42) ;  or  when,  fol- 
lowed by  the  name,  they  are  preceded  by  the  article 
"the": 


lo  The   University  o j  Chicago  Press 

McKinley,  president  of  the  United  States;  B.  L.  Gildersleeve, 
professor  of  Greek  (see  42);  Ferdinand  W.  Peck,  commis- 
sioner-general to  the  Paris  Exposition;  the  emperor  of 
Germany,  the  vice-president,  the  secretary  of  the  interior,  the 
senator,  the  archbishop  of  Canterbury,  the  mayor  of  Chicago; 
the  archduke  Francis  Ferdinand,  the  apostle  Paul. 

20.  Abbreviations  like  Ph.D.,  M.P.,  and  F.R.G.S.  (such 

titles  to  be  set  without  space  between  the    letters). 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  phrases  when  spelled  out : 

doctor  of  philosophy,  fellow  of  the  Royal  Geographical 
Society. 

21.  Nouns  and  adjectives  used  to  designate  the  Supreme 
Being  or  Power,  or  any  member  of  the  Christian 
Trinity;  and  all  pronouns  referring  to  the  Deity, 
when  not  immediately  preceded  or  followed  by  a 
distinctive  name,  and  unless  such  reference  is  other- 
wise perfectly  clear: 

the  Almighty,  Ruler  of  the  universe,  the  First  Cause,  the 
Absolute,  Providence  (personified),  Father,  Son,  Holy  Ghost, 
the  Spirit,  Savior,  Messiah,  Son  of  man,  Christology,  the 
Logos,  [the  Virgin  Mary];  "Put  your  trust  in  Him  wHo  rules 
all  things;"  but:  "When  God  had  worked  six  days,  he  rested 
on  the  seventh." 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  expressions  and  deriva- 
tives as — 

(God's)  fatherhood,  (Jesus')  sonship,  messiahship,  messianic 
hope,  christological. 

22.  "Nature"  and  similar  terms,  and  abstract  ideas, 
when  personified: 


Manual  oj  Style:    Capitalization  ii 

"Nature  wields  her  scepter  mercilessly;"  Vice  in  the  old 
English  morality-plays. 

23.  ''Father"  used  for  church  father,  and  ''reformers" 

used  of  Reformation  leaders,  whenever  the  meaning 

otherwise  would  be  ambiguous: 

the  Fathers,  the  early  Fathers,  the  Greek  Fathers,  [Pilgrim 
Fathers],  the  Reformers  (but:  the  church  reformers  of  the 
fifteenth  century). 

24.  The  word  "church"  in  properly  cited  titles  of 
nationally  organized  bodies  of  believers  in  which, 
through  historical  associations,  it  has  become  insepa- 
rably Hnked  with  the  name  of  a  specific  locahty;  or 
when  forming  part  of  the  name  of  a  particular 
edifice : 

Church  of  Rome,  Church  of  England,  High  Church ;  Church 
of  the  Holy  Sepulcher,  Fifth  Avenue  Baptist  Church,  First 
Methodist  Church. 

But  do  not  capitaHze,  except  as  noted  above,  when 

standing  alone,  in  any  sense — universal,  national, 

local — or  when  the  name  is  not  correctly  or  fully 

quoted : 

the  church  (  =  organized  Christianity),  the   Eastern   (Greek 
Orthodox)  church,  the  Roman   Catholic  church,  the  estab 
lished  church  (but:  the  Establishment),  the  state  church;  the 
Baptist  church  in  Englewood. 

Note. — In  exceptional  cases,  where  the  opposition  of  Church 
and  State  constitutes  a  fundamental  part  of  the  argument,  and  it 
is  desired  to  lend  force  to  this  antithesis,  emphasis  may  be  added 
by  capitalizing  the  two  words.     (See  Preface.) 


12  The   University  o  j  Chicago  Press 

25.  Names  for  the  Bible  and  other  sacred  books: 

(Holy,  Sacred)  Scriptures,  Holy  Writ,  Word  of  God,  Book  of 
Books;  Koran,  Vedas. 

But  do  not  capitalize  adjectives  derived  from  such 

nouns : 

biblical,  scriptural. 

26.  Versions  of  the  Enghsh  Bible: 

King  James's  Version,  Authorized  Version  (A.  V.),  Revised 
Version  (R.  V.),  Polychrome  Bible. 

27.  Books  and  divisions  of  the  Bible: 

Old  Testament,  Pentateuch,  Exodus,  II  (Second)  Kings, 
Book  of  Job,  Psalms  (Psalter),  Song  of  Songs,  the  [Mosaic] 
Law  and  the  [writings  of  the]  Prophets,  Minor  Prophets, 
Wisdom  literature,  Septuagint  (LXX);  Gospel  of  Luke, 
Synoptic  Gospels,  Fourth  Gospel,  Acts  of  the  Apostles  (the 
Acts),  Epistle  to  the  Romans,  Pastoral  Epistles,  Apocalypse 
(Revelation),  Sermon  on  the  Mount,  Beatitudes,  Lord's  Prayer, 
Ten  Commandments  (Decalogue). 

But  do  not  capitalize  words  Hke  *'book,"  "gospel," 

''epistle,"  or  ''psalm"  in   such  connections  as  the 

following: 

the  five  books  of  Moses,  the  first  forty  psalms,  the  gospels 
and  epistles  of  the  New  Testament,  [the  synoptic  problem], 
the  biblical  apocalypses. 

28.  Biblical  parables: 

parables  of  the  Prodigal  Son  and  the  Lost  Coin. 

29.  The  following  miscellaneous  bibHcal  terms: 

Last  Supper,  Eucharist,  the  Passion,  the  Twelve  (apostles), 


■ 


Manual  of  Style:    Capitalization  13 

the  Seventy  (disciples),  the  Servant,  the  Day  of  Yahweh,  the 
Chronicler,  the  Psalmist. 

30.  The  first  word  of  a  sentence,  and  in  poetry  the  first 
word  of  each  Hne: 

In  summer,  on  the  headlands, 

The  Baltic  Sea  along. 
Sits  Neckan,  with  his  harp  of  gold, 

And  sings  his  plaintive  song. 

In  Greek  and  Latin  poetry,  however,  capitalize  only 
the  first  word  of  a  paragraph,  not  of  each  verse : 

TolcTL  8'  dotSos  aeiSe  TreptKXvTos,  ol  Se  crioiirrj 
eiar'  aKovovres'  6  8'  'Ap(aiwv  vocttov  aetSev, 
Xvypov,  ov  €K  Tpoir]<s  eTreretAaTO  HaWas    A6-qvrj. 
Tov  8'  VTrepiOLoOev  <f>p€.(Tl  avvOcTO  Bicrinv  aoi^-qv 
Kovprj  'iKaptoLO,  TrepL<f>p(i}v  Ilr/veXoTreta' 

31.  The  first  word  after  a  colon  only  when  introducing 
a  complete  passage,  or  sentence  which  would  have 
independent  meaning,  as  in  summarizations  and  quo- 
tations not  closely  connected  with  what  precedes; 
or  where  the  colon  has  the  weight  of  such  expression 
as  ''as  follows,"  ''namely,"  "for  instance,"  or  a 
similar  phrase,  and  is  followed  by  a  logically  com- 
plete sentence: 

"In  conclusion  I  wish  to  say:  It  will  be  seen  from  the  above 
that  ....;"  *'As  the  old  proverb  has  it:  'Haste  makes 
waste;'"  "My  theory  is:  The  moment  the  hot  current  strikes 
the  surface  ....;"  "Several  objections  might  be  made  to 
this  assertion :     First,  it  might  be  said  that  .  .  .  ." 


14  The   University  o  j  Chicago   Press 

But  do  not  capitalize  the  first  word  of  a  quotation,  if 
immediately  connected  with  what  precedes  (unless, 
as  the  first  word  of  a  sentence,  beginning  a  paragraph 
in  reduced  type) ;  nor  the  first  word  after  a  colon,  if 
an  implied  ''namely,"  or  a  similar  term,  is  followed 
by  a  brief  explanatory  phrase,  logically  dependent 
upon  the  preceding  clause;  or  if  the  colon  signal- 
izes a  note  of  comment: 

''The  old  adage  is  true  that  'haste  makes  waste;'"  "Two 
explanations  present  themselves:  either  he  came  too  late  for 
the  train,  or  he  was  detained  at  the  station;"  "We  could  not 
prevail  upon  the  natives  to  recross  the  stream:  so  great  was 
their  superstition." 

32.  As  a  rule,  the  first  word  in  sections  of  enumeration, 
if  any  individual  link  contains  two  or  more  distinct 
clauses  (not  inclosed  in  parentheses),  separated  by 
a  semicolon,  colon,  or  period,  unless  all  are  depend- 
ent upon  the  same  term  preceding  them  and  leading 
up  to  them: 

"His  reasons  for  refusal  were  three:  (i)  He  did  not  have  the 
time.  (2)  He  did  not  have  the  means;  or,  at  any  rate,  had  no 
funds  available  at  the  moment.  (3)  He  doubted  the  feasibility 
of  the  plan."  But:  "He  objected  that  (i)  he  did  not  have  the 
time;  (2)  he  did  not  have  the  means;  or,  at  any  rate,  had  no 
funds  available;  (3)  he  doubted  the  feasibility  of  the  plan." 
(See  125.) 

33.  As  a  rule,  nouns  followed  by  a  numeral — particu- 
larly a  capitalized  Roman  numeral — indicating  their 
order  in  a  sequence: 


M  an  ua  I  0  j  S  t  yl  e  :    Capitalization  15 

Room  16,  Ps.  20,  Grade  IV,  Art.  II,  Act  I;  Vol.  I,  No.  2  (of 
journals;  otherwise  "  no."),  Book  II,  Div.  Ill,  Part  IV. 

But   do  not  capitalize  such   minor  subdivisions  of 

publications  as — 

sec.  4,  scene  i;  chap.  2  (ii),  p.  7  (vii),  vs.  11,  1.  5,  n.  6.  (On 
the  abbreviation  of  these  words  see  100.) 

34.  The  first  word  of  a  cited  speech  (thought)  in  direct 

discourse,  whether  preceded  by  a  colon  or  a  comma 

(on  this  see  118): 

"On  leaving  he  remarked:  'Never  shall  I  forget  this  day;'" 
"With  the  words,  'Never  shall  I  forget  this  day,'  he  departed;" 
"I  thought  to  myself:  This  day  I  shall  never  forget"  (without 
quotation  marks). 

35.  In  resolutions,  the  first  words  following  "Whereas" 

and  ^^ Resolved'^   (these  are  preceded  by  a  comma): 

Whereas,  It  has  pleased  God  .  .  .  .  ;  therefore  be  it 
Resolved,  That  .... 

36.  The  exclamations  ''  O  "  and  "  Oh  " : 

"  O  Lord!  "  "  Oh,  that  I  were  home  again!  " 

37.  All  the  principal  words  (i.  e.,  nouns,  pronouns, 
adjectives,  adverbs,  verbs,  first  and  last  words)  in 
English  titles  of  publications  (books,  pamphlets,  doc- 
uments, periodicals,  reports,  proceedings,  etc.),  and 
their  divisions  (parts,  chapters,  sections,  poems,  arti- 
cles, etc.);  in  subjects  of  lectures,  papers,  toasts,  etc.; 
in  cap-and-small-cap  and  itahc  center-heads  (both 
of  which,  however,  should  be  avoided),  and  bold- 


i6  The  University  o  j  Chicago  Press 

face  cut-in  and  side-heads;  in  cap-and-small-cap  box- 
heads  in  tables  (for  illustrations  of  these  see  260-63) : 

The  Men  Who  Made  the  Nation;  The  American  College — 
Its  Past  and  Present;  the  Report  of  the  Committee  of  Nine; 
"In  the  Proceedings  of  the  National  Educational  Association 
for  1899  there  appeared  a  paper  entitled,  'What  Should  Be 
the  Attitude  of  the  University  on  the  Political  Questions  of 
Today  ? ' "  (In  mentioning  newspapers  and  magazines  do  not 
treat  the  definite  article  "the"  as  part  of  the  title,  unless 
necessary  to  the  sense:  the  Forum,  the  North  American 
Review,  the  Chicago  Tribune;  but:  The  World  To-Day.) 

Note. — The   Botanical  Gazette  capitalizes  only  first  words 
and  proper  names. 

In  foreign  titles  of  the  same  class  follow  these  general 
rules:  In  Latin,  capitalize  proper  nouns  and  adjec- 
tives; in  French,  Italian,  Spanish,  and  Swedish, 
capitalize  only  proper  nouns ;  in  German  and  Dan- 
ish, capitalize  both  common  and  proper  nouns;  in 
Dutch,  follow  the  same  general  rules  as  in  German, 
and  capitalize  also  proper  adjectives: 

De  amicitia,  Bellum  Gallicum;  Histoire  de  la  litterature 
frangaise,  Novelle  e  racconti  popolari  italiani,  Antologia  de 
poetas  liricos  castellanos,  Svenska  litteraturens  historic;  Ge- 
schichte  des  deutschen  Feudalwesens,  Videnskabens  Fremskridt 
i  det  nittende  Aarhundrede;  Geschiedenis  der  Nederlandsche 
Taal. 

38.   Titles  of  ancient  manuscripts  (singular,  MS;  plural, 
MSS): 

Codex  Bezae,  Vatican  Palimpsest,  Gospel  according  to  the 
Egyptians,  Oxyrhynchus  Logia  (Sayings)  of  Jesus. 


Manual  oj  Style:    Capitalization  17 

39.  In  titles  with  the  main  words  capitahzed,  all  nouns 

forming  parts  of  hyphenated  compounds: 

"  Twentieth-Century  Progress,"  "  The  Economy  of  High- 
Speed  Trains." 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  components  when  other 

than  nouns : 

Fifty-first  Street,  ''Lives  of  Well-known  Authors,"  "World - 
Dominion  of  EngHsh-speaking  Peoples." 

40.  In  zoological,  botanical,  and  similar  technical  matter, 
the  scientific  (Latin)  names  of  divisions,  orders, 
families,  and  genera  (the  names  of  species  in  lower- 
case type,  except  when  proper  names  in  nominative 
or  genitive  cases,  or  proper  adjectives  [not  geographi- 
cal]) : 

Vertebrata,  Reptilia,  Cruciferae,  Salix;  Felis  ho,  Cocos 
nucifera;  (but:  Rosa  Carolina,  Trijolium  Willdenovii,  Par- 
kinsonia  Torreyana  [Styrax  californica]).  (Names  of  species, 
as  a  rule,  are  to  be  set  in  italics;  see  61.) 

41.  In  astronomical  work,  the  names  of  the  bodies  of 
our  solar  system : 

Sun,  Moon,  Earth,  the  Milky  Way. 

42.  Divisions,  departments,  officers,  and  courses  of  study 

of  the  University  of  Chicago,   in   all   official   work 

deahng  with  its  administration  or  curricula: 

(the  University),  the  School  of  Education  (the  School),  the 
University  Extension  Division  (but:  the  division),  the  Depart- 
ment of  Anthropology  (but:  the  department);  the  Board  of 
Trustees  (the  Trustees,  the  Board),  the  Senate,  the  Council, 


i8  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

the  Faculty  of  the  College  of  Commerce  and  Administration 
(but:  the  faculty);  the  President,  the  Registrar,  Professor  of 
Physics,  Assistant  in  Chemistry,  Fellow,  Scholar;  the  Van 
Husen  Scholarship  (but:  the  scholarship);  courses  in  Political 
Economy,  Autumn  Quarter  (but:  a  quarter),  First  Term  (but: 
two  terms;  major,  minor);  [Hall  (referring  to  the  University 
dormitories)]. 

Use  Capitals  and  Small  Capitals  for — 
43.   The  names  of  town  and  state  in  the  date  line,  and 
the  salutatory  phrase  at  the  beginning,  of  letters, 
and  the  signature  and  residence  at  the  end  of  letters 

or  articles,  etc. : 

Chicago,  III.,  January  i,  1906 

(Set  to  the  right,  with  one  em's  indention,  and  in  smaller  type 
than  the  body  of  the  letter.) 

My  dear  Mr.  Smith: 

(Set  flush,  followed  by  a  colon,  in  the  same  type  as  the  body 
of  the  letter,  and  in  a  separate  line,  unless  preceded  by 
another  line  giving  the  name  and  address,  in  which  case  it 
should  be  run  in  with  the  text  of  the  letter  [see  54]). 

Charles  W.  Scott 
(Set  to  the  right,  with  one  em's  indention,  and  in  the  same 
type  as  the  body  of  the  letter  or  article.) 

Harvard  University 

.  Cambridge,  Mass. 
(Set  to  the  left,  with  two  ems'  indention,  in  smaller  type.) 
(If  this  address  contains  more  than  one  line,  or  the  date  or 
similar  matter  is  added,  only  the  first  line  is  to  be  set  in  caps 
and  small  caps;  the  second,  in  caps  and  lower-case,  and 
centered  under  the  first.) 


Manual  of  Style:    Capitalization  19 

44.  In  resolutions,  the  word  ''Whereas"  (see  35);  in 
notes  (not  footnotes),  the  word  ''Note,"  which 
should  be  followed  by  a  period  and  a  dash;  in  con- 
stitutions, by-laws,  etc.,  the  word  "Section"  intro- 
ducing paragraphs  and  followed  by  a  number: 

Note. — It  should  be  noticed  that  .... 
Section  i  .    This  association  shall  be  styled  .... 

Set  in  Small  Capitals — 

45.  A.M.  and  P.M.  {ante  and  post  meridiem),  and  B.C. 
and  A.  D.  ("before  Christ"  and  anno  domini) ;  these 
are  to  be  set  with  a  thin  space  between: 

11:30    A.M.;    53    B.C.,   1906    A.  D. 

Use  Small  Initial  Letter  for  (i.  e.,  "  lower-case") — 

46.  Words  of  common  usage,  originally  proper  names, 

and  their  derivatives,  in  whose  present,  generalized 

acceptation  their  origin  has  become  obscured,  and 

generally  all  verbs  derived  from  proper  names  (see  i) : 

Utopia,  bohemian,  philistine,  titanic,  platonic,  quixotic, 
bonanza,  china,  morocco,  guinea  pig,  boycott,  roman  (type), 
italicize,  christianize,  anglicize,  macadamized. 

47.  Such  minor  subdivisions  in  literary  references  as — 

chapter,  section,  page,  verse,  line,  note.  (See  33,  100,  and 
218.) 

48.  In  italic  side-heads,  all  but  the  first  word  and  proper 
names. 

For  illustrations  see  156  and  261. 


20  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

49.   The  first  word  of  a  quotation  which,  through  a  con- 
junction or  similarly,  is  immediately  connected  with 
what  precedes,  even  if  such  word  in  the  original 
begins  a  sentence. 
For  illustration  and  exception  see  118;  cf.  31. 


< 


Manual  of  Style:    Italics  21 


THE  USE  OF  ITALICS 

Italicize — 

50.  Words  or  phrases   to  which  it  is  desired  to  lend 

emphasis,  importance,  etc.: 

"This  was,  however,  not  the  case;"  "It  is  sufficiently  plain 
that  the  sciences  of  life,  at  least,  are  studies  of  processes." 

51.  From  foreign  languages,  words  and  phrases  inserted 
into  the  English  text,  and  not  incorporated  into  the 
English  language;  and  single  sentences  or  brief  pas- 
sages not  of  sufficient  length  to  call  for  reduced  type 

(see  75) : 

''the  Darwinian  Weltanschauung;^^  ''Napoleon's  coup  d^etat;^' 
"the  debater  par  excellence  of  the  Senate;"  "De  gustibus  non 
est  disputanduMy  or,  as  the  French  have  it,  Chacun  d  son 
goUtr 

But  do  not  italicize  foreign  titles  preceding  names, 

or  names  of  foreign  institutions  or  places  the  meaning 

or  position  of  which  in  English  would  have  required 

roman  type,  and  which  either  are  without  English 

equivalents  or  are  by  preference  used  in  lieu  of  these ; 

nor  words  of  everyday  occurrence  which  have  become 

sufficiently  anglicized,  although  still  retaining  their 

accents : 

P^re    Lagrange,     Freiherr    von    Schwenau;    the     German 
Reichstag,  the  Champs  Elysdes,  the  Museo  delle  Terme; 


22 


The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


a  prion 

ennui 

per  annum 

a  propos 

entree 

per  r^pita 

attache 

ex  cathedra 

per  contra 

bona  fide 

ex  officio 

post  mortem 

bric-a-brac 

expose 

pro  and  con(tra) 

cafe 

facade 

protege 

charge  d'affaires 

fete 

pro  tem(pore) 

confrere 

habeas  corpus 

regime 

connoisseur 

levee 

resume 

cul-de-sac 

litterateur 

role 

debris 

matinee 

savant 

debut 

melee 

soiree 

decollete 

motif 

umlaut 

denouement 

naive 

tete-a-tete 

depot  (=  depository) 

nee 

versus  (vs.) 

dramatis  personae 

net 

via 

eclat 

neve 

vice  versa 

elite 

papier  mache 

vis-a-vis 

52 .  Titles  of  publications — books  (including  plays,  essays, 
cycles  of  poems,  and  single  poems  of  considerable 
length,  usually  printed  separately,  and  not  from  the 
context  understood  to  form  parts  of  a  larger  vol- 
ume), pamphlets,  treatises,  tracts,  documents,  and 
periodicals  (including  regularly  appearing  proceed- 
ings and  transactions;  and  also  applying  to  the 
name  of  a  journal  appearing  in  the  journal  itself) : 

Spencer,  Principles  of  Sociology;  A  Midsummer  Night's 
Dream;  Carlyle,  Essay  on  Burns;  Idylls  of  the  King;  Paradise 
Lost;  the  Independent,  the  Modern  Language  Review,  the  Chi- 
cago Tribune,  Report  of  the  United  States  Commissioner  of 
Education,  Transactions  of  the  Illinois  Society  for  Child  Study. 

Note. — The  Botanical  Gazette  uses  itahcs  for  such  titles  in  the 
"^        text  only;  in  footnotes,  reman.     Its  own  name  it  prints  in  caps 
and  small  caps. 


Manual  of  Style:    Italics  23 

Books  of  the  Bible,  both  canonical  and  apocryphal, 
and  titles  of  ancient  manuscripts,  should  be  set  in 
roman  type  (see  27  and  38). 

53.  The  following  words,   phrases,   and   abbreviations 
used  in  literary  references : 

ibid.j  idem,  loc.  cit.,  op.  cit.,ad  loc,  s.  v.,  supra,  infra,  passim,  vide . 

But  do  not  itahcize — 

cf.,  i.e.,  e.  g.  (set  with  a  thin  space). 

54.  Address  lines  in  speeches,  reports,  etc.,  and  primary 
address  lines  in  letters: 

Mr.  President,  Ladies  and  Gentlemen : 

Mr.  'John  Smith,  J2i  Dearborn  Street,  Chicago,  III. 

Dear  Sir:     I  take  pleasure  in  announcing  .... 
(Set  this  flush,  in  a  separate  line,  with  nouns  capitalized  [see  43].) 

55.  In  signatures,  the  position  or  title  added  after  the 
name.  If  this  consists  of  only  one  word,  it  is  run  into 
the  same  line  with  the  name;  if  of  more  than  one, 
but  no  longer  than  the  name,  center  the  first  letter 
under  the  name  line,  and  indent  one  em  on  the 
right ;  if  longer  than  the  name,  center  the  name  over 
the  second  hne  and  set  this  flush.  These  rules  are, 
however,  subject  to  the  exigencies  of  special  cases: 

Arthur  P.  Maguire,  Secretary 

Yours  very  truly, 

Carter  H.  H,\rrison 

Mayor  of  Chicago 

Charles  M.  Gayley 
Professor  of  English  Language  and  Literature 


24  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

56.  a),  b)y  c)j  etc.,  used  to  indicate  subdivisions  (single 
parenthesis  if  beginning  a  paragraph,  double  paren- 
theses if  "run  in");  and  a,  6,  c,  etc.,  affixed  to  the 
number  of  verse,  page,  etc.,  to  denote  fractional  part: 
Luke  4  :  31a  (with  a  hair-space). 

57.  Letters  used  to  designate  unknown  quantities,  lines, 
etc.,  in  algebraic,  geometrical,  and  similar  matter: 
ac  +  bc=cia  +  b);  the  lines  ad  and  AD;  the  wth  power. 

58.  As  a  rule,  letters  in  legends  or  in  the  text  referring 
to  corresponding  letters  in  accompanying  illustra- 
tions : 

"At  the  point  A  above  (see  diagram)." 

59.  References  to  particular  letters: 
the  letter  u,  a  small  v. 

60.  s.  and  d.  (=  shilHngs  and  pence)  following  numerals: 
3^.  6d.  (with  a  hair- space). 

61.  In  zoological,  botanical,  and  similar  matter,  scien- 
tific (Latin)  names  of  species;  and  in  astronomical 
matter,  names  of  stars  or  constellations: 

Felis  leo,  Rosa  Carolina;  Saturn,  Cassiopeia. 

62.  In  resolutions,  the  word  ^^ Resolved'^  (see  35). 

63.  After  headlines,  as  a  rule,  the  word  ^'Continued;'' 
and  [To  be  continued]  at  the  end  of  articles: 

THE  SCOPE  OF  SOCIOLOGY— Cow/mM^J 
[To  he  continued] 


M  anual  0  j  S  t  yl  e  :    Quotations  25 


QUOTATIONS 

Put  between  Quotation  Marks  (and  in  roman  type  — 
i.e.,  "  roman-quote") — 

64.  Citations,  run  into  the  text,  of  a  passage  from  an 
author  in  his  own  words  (see  75). 

65.  Quotations  from  different  authors  following  each 
other  uninterrupted  by  any  intervening  original 
matter. 

66.  A  word  or  phrase  accompanied  by  its  definition: 

"Drop-foliQ"  means  a  page-number  at  the  bottom  of  the 
page;   Such  a  piece  of  metal  is  called  a  "slug." 

67.  An  unusual,  technical,  ironical,  etc.,  word  or  phrase 

in  the  text,  whether  or  not  accompanied  by  a  word, 

like  "so-called,"  directing  attention  to  it: 

Her  "five  o'clocks"  were  famous  in  the  neighborhood;  She 
was  wearing  a  gown  of  "lobster-colored "  silk ;  He  was  elected 
"master  of  the  rolls;"  We  then  repaired  to  what  he  called 
his  "quarter  deck;"  A  "lead"  is  then  inserted  between  the 
lines;  This  so-called  "man  of  affairs;"  A  self-styled  "con- 


noisseur." 


68.  In  translations,  the  English  equivalent  of  a  word, 

phrase,  or  passage  from  a  foreign  language : 

Weltanschauung^  "world-view"  or    "fundamental  aspect  of 
life;"   Mommsen,  Romische  Geschichte  ("History  of  Rome"). 

69.  The  particular  word  or  words  to  which  attention  is 
directed : 


26  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

the  term  " lynch  law;"  the  phrase  " liberty  of  conscience;'* 
the  concepts  "good"  and  "bad;"  the  name  "  Chicago." 

70.  Serial  titles: 

"English  Men  of  Letters"  series;  "International  Critical 
Commentary." 

71.  Titles  of  shorter  poems  (see  52): 
Shelley's  "To  a  Skylark." 

72.  Cited  titles  of  subdivisions  (e.g.,  parts,  books,  chap- 
ters, etc.)  of  publications;  of  papers,  lectures,  ser- 
mons, articles,  toasts,  mottoes,  etc.: 

The  Beginnings  of  the  Science  of  Political  Economy ,  Vol.  I, 
'The  British  School,"  chap.  2,  "John  Stuart  Mill;"  the 
articles  "Cross,"  "Crucifixion,"  and,  "Crusade"  in  Hast- 
ings' Dictionary  of  the  Bible;  The  subject  of  the  lecture  was 
'Japan — Its  Past,  Present,  and  Future;"  the  next  toast  on 
the  programme  was  "Our  German  Visitor;"  The  king's 
motto  is  "  For  God  and  My  Country." 

Note. — The  Botanical  Gazette,  in  footnotes,  uses  no  quotation 
marks  for  such  titles. 

References  to  the  Preface,  Introduction,   Table  of 

Contents,  Index,  etc.,  of  a  specific  work,  should  be 

set  with  capitals,  without  quotation  marks : 

Preface,  p.  iii;  "The  Introduction  contains  ....;"  "The 
Appendix  occupies  a  hundred  pages;"  but:  "The  book  has 
a  very  complete  index." 

73.  Names  of  ships: 
theU.  S.  SS.  "Oregon." 

74.  Titles  of  works  of  art: 
Murillo's  "The  Holy  Family." 


Manual  of  Style:    Quotations  27 

Set  in  Smaller  Type — 

75.  Ordinarily,  all  prose  extracts  which  will  make  three 
or  more  lines  in  the  smaller  type,  and  all  poetry 
citations  of  two  lines  or  more.  An  isolated  prose 
quotation,  even  though  its  length  would  bring  it 
under  this  rule,  may  properly  be  run  into  the  text,  if 
it  bears  an  organic  relation  to  the  argument  pre- 
sented. On  the  other  hand,  a  quotation  of  one  or 
two  Unes  which  is  closely  preceded  or  followed  by 
longer  extracts,  set  in  smaller  type,  may  Hkewise  be 
reduced,  as  a  matter  of  uniform  appearance. 

76.  As  a  rule,  reduce  from  ii-pt.  and  lo-pt.  to  9-pt., 
from  9-pt.  to  8-pt.,  from  8-pt.  to  6-pt.  (see  233). 

77.  Reduced  citations  should  not  have  quotation  marks, 
except  in  such  cases  as  noted  in  65;  nor  should 
■quotation  marks,  as  a  rule,  be  used  in  connection 
with  italics. 

General  Rules — 

78.  Quotation  marks  should  always  include  elHpses,  and 
the  phrase  "etc."  when  it  otherwise  would  not  be 
clear  that  it  stands  for  an  omitted  part  of  the  matter 
quoted,  perfect  clearness  in  each  individual  case 
being  the  best  criterion: 

"Art.  II,  sec.  2,  of  the  Constitution  provides  that  'each  state 
shall  appoint  ....  a  number  of  electors  equal  to  the  whole 
number  of  senators  and  representatives  ....;'"  "He  also 
wrote  af series  of  'Helps  to  Discovery,  etc.'" — "etc."  here 


28  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

indicating,  not  that  he  wrote  other  works  which  are  unnamed, 
but  that  the  title  of  the  one  named  is  not  given  in  full;  but, 
on  the  other  hand:   "Preaching  from  the  text,  'For  God  so 

loved   the   world,'    etc " — "etc."    here   being   placed 

outside  of  the  quotation  marks  in  order  to  show  that  it  does 
not  stand  for  other,  unnamed,  objects  of  God's  love. 

79.  Quoted  prose  matter  (i.  e.,  matter  set  with  quotation 
marks;  see  above)  which  is  broken  up  into  para- 
graphs should  have  the  quotation  marks  repeated 
at  the  beginning  of  each  paragraph. 

80.  Where  alignment  is  desired,  the  quotation  marks 

should  be  "cleared" — i.e.,  should  project  beyond 

the  line  of  alignment : 

"Keep  away  from  dirtiness — keep  away  from  mess. 
Don't  get  into  doin'  things  rather-more -or-less!" 

81.  Double  quotation  marks  are  used  for  primary  quota- 
tions; for  a  quotation  within  a  quotation,  single; 
going  back  to  double  for  a  third,  to  single  for  a 
fourth,  and  so  on : 

"The  orator  then  proceeded:  'The  dictionary  tells  us  that 
"the  words  'freedom'  and  'liberty,'  though  often  inter-* 
changed,  are  distinct  in  some  of  their  applications. 


)>  }  >> 


M  antial  0  j  S I  yl  e  :    Spelling  29 


SPELLING 

Spell  out — 

82.  All  civil  and  military  titles,  and  forms  of  address, 
preceding  the  name,  except  Mr.,  Messrs.,  Mrs. 
(French:  M.,  MM.,  M™^  M"^),  Dr.,  Rev.,  Hon. 
{do  not,  except  in  quotations,  set  the  Rev.,  the  Hon.) ; 
Esq.,  following  the  name,  should  likewise  always  be 
abbreviated. 

83.  Christian  names,  as  George,  Charles,  John  (not: 
Geo.,  Chas.,  Jno.),  except  where  the  abbreviated 
form  is  used  in  quoted  matter  or  in  original  signa- 
tures; and  "von"  as  part  of  a  person's  name. 

Note. — In  the  matter  of  alphabetizing  names  the  following 
rules  should  be  observed: 

a)  Hyphenated  names  are  ordinarily  alphabetized  under  the 
name  following  the  hyphen;  thus,  Henry  Chandler-Taylor  comes 
under  Taylor  and  not  under  Chandler  (Taylor,  Henry  Chandler-). 

h)  French  and  German  names  preceded  by  the  particles  "de" 
and  "von,"  written  in  the  usual  fashion  with  lower-case  letters, 
are  regularly  listed  under  the  letter  following  the  particle.  In 
individual  cases  it  may  be  found  that  the  person  always  capital- 
izes the  particle  and  treats  it  as  a  part  of  the  surname.  (Ram- 
beau,  Emile  de;  Stcrnthal,  Max  von;  De  Bey,  Robert.) 

c)  The  Dutch  prefi.x  "Van"  is  regularly  capitalized  and 
treated  as  the  first  part  of  the  surname;  such  names  are  listed 

,  under  V.     (Van  Maastricht,  Hendrj^k.) 

d)  Spanish  names  having  two  parts  connected  by  the  particle 
"y"  are  listed  under  the  name  preceding  the  connective.  (Go- 
mez y  Pineda,  Liberio.) 


30  The   University  o j  Chicago  Press 

e)  Names  beginning  with  "Mc,"  whether  the  "Mc"  part  is 
written  "Mc,"  "Mac,"  "M',"  or  "Mac"  without  the  following  letter 
being  capitalized  (as  in  "Macomber"),  fall  into  one  alphabetical 
list,  as  if  spelled  "Mac." 

84.  In  ordinary  reading- matter,  all  numbers  of  less  than 
three  digits,  unless  of  a  statistical  or  technical  charac- 
ter, or  occurring  in  groups  of  six  or  more  following 
each  other  in  close  succession : 

"There  are  thirty-eight  cities  in  the  United  States  with  a 
population  of  100,000  or  over;"  "a  fifty-yard  dash;"  **two 
pounds  of  sugar;"  "Four  horses,  sixteen  cows,  seventy -six 
sheep,  and  a  billy  goat  constituted  the  live  stock  of  the  farm;" 
"He  spent  a  total  of  two  years,  three  months,  and  seventeen 
days  in  jail."  But:  "He  spent  128  days  in  the  hospital;" 
"a  board  20  feet  2  inches  long  by  ij  feet  wide  and  i\  inches 
thick;"  "the  ratio  of  16  to  i;"  "In  some  quarters  of  Paris, 
inhabited  by  wealthy  families,  the  death-rate  is  i  to  every  65 
persons;  in  others,  inhabited  by  the  poor,  it  is  i  to  15;"  "His 
purchase  consisted  of  2  pounds  of  sugar,  20  pounds  of  flour, 
I  pound  of  coffee,  §  pound  of  tea,  3  pounds  of  meat,  and 
i\  pounds  of  fish,  besides  2  pecks  of  potatoes  and  a  pint  of 
vinegar." 

Treat  all  numbers  in  connected  groups  alike,  as  far 

as  possible;  do  not  use  figures  for  some  and  spell  out 

others;  if  the  largest  contains  three  or  more  digits, 

use  figures  for  all  (see  86) ;  per  cent,  should  always 

take  figures : 

"The  force  employed  during  the  three  months  was  87,  93, 
and  106,  respectively;"   i-io  per  cent. 

85.  Round  numbers  (i.e.,  approximate  figures  in   even 


Manual  oj  Style:    Spelling  31 

units,  the  unit  being  100  in  numbers  of  less  than 

1,000,  and  1,000  in  numbers  of  more) : 

"The  attendance  was  estimated  at  five  hundred"  (but:  "at 
550");  "a  thesis  of  about  three  thousand  words"  (but:  "of 
about  2,700");  "The  population  of  Chicago  is  approximately 
two  milHons"  (but:  "1,900,000").  Cases  like  1,500,  if  for 
some  special  reason  spelled  out,  should  be  written  "fifteen 
hundred,"  not  "one  thousand  five  hundred." 

86.  All  numbers,  no  matter  how  high,  commencing  a 

sentence  in  ordinary  reading-matter : 

"Five  hundred  and  ninety-three  men,  417  women,  and  126 
children  under  eighteen,  besides  63  of  the  crew,  went  down 
with  the  ship." 

When  this  is  impracticable,  reconstruct  the  sentence; 
e.  g. : 

"The  total  number  of  those  who  went  down  with  the  ship 
was  593  men,"  etc. 

87.  Sums  of  money,  when  occurring  in  isolated  cases  in 
ordinary  reading-matter : 

"The  admission  was  two  dollars." 

When  several  such  numbers  occur  close  together,  and 
in  all  matter  of  a  statistical  character,  use  figures : 
"Admission:   men,  $2;   women,  $1;  children,  25  cents." 

88.  Time  of  day,  in  ordinary  reading-matter: 

at  four;  at  half-past  two  in  the  afternoon;  at  seven  o'clock. 
Statistically,  in  enumerations,  and  always  in  connec- 
tion with  A.  M.  and  p.  M.,  use  figures: 
at  4:15  p.  M.  (omit  "o'clock"  in  such  connections). 


32  The  University  o j  Chicago  Press 

89.  Ages: 

eighty  years  and  four  months  old;  children  between  six  and 
fourteen. 

90.  Numbers  of  centuries,  of  Egyptian  dynasties,  of 
sessions  of  Congress,  of  military  bodies,  of  political 
divisions,  of  thoroughfares,  and  in  all  similar  cases, 
unless  brevity  is  an  important  consideration  (see 
5,  6,  and  11): 

nineteenth  century;  Fifth  Dynasty;  Fifty-fourth  Congress, 
Second  Session;  Fifteenth  Infantry  I.  N.  G.;  Sixth  Con- 
gressional District,  Second  Ward;  Fifth  Avenue. 

91.  References  to  particular  decades: 
in  the  nineties. 

92.  Names  of  months,  except  in  statistical  matter  or  in 
long  enumerations: 

from  January  i  to  April  15  (omit,  after  dates,  st,  d,  and  th). 

93.  ''United  States,"  except  in  quotations  and  such  con- 
nections as:  General  Schofield,  U.  S.  A.;  U.  S.  SS. 
''Oregon;"  in  footnotes  and  similar  references:  U.  S. 
Geological  Survey. 

94.  "Railroad  (-v^^ay),"  and  "Fort"  and  "Mount"  in 

geographical  appellations: 

Chicago,  Milwaukee  &  St.  Paul  Railroad  (not:  R.  R.  or  Ry.); 
Fort  Wayne,  Mount  Elias. 

95.  In  most  cases,  all  names  of  publications.  This  rule, 
like  many  another,  is  open  to  modification  in  particu- 
lar instances,  for  which  no  directions  can  here  be 


Manual  of  Style:    Spelling  33 

given.  Expediency,  nature  of  context,  authoritative 
usage,  and  author's  preference  are  some  of  the  points 
to  be  considered.  Generally,  if  in  doubt,  spell  out; 
good  taste  will  condone  offenses  in  this  direction 
more  readily  than  in  the  opposite. 

Abbreviate — 

96.  Names  of  states  and  territories  in  the  United  States 
following  those  of  towns,  with  the  usual  exceptions,  as 
follows : 

Ala.  1irV\.oVravv<-0i^    La.  Ore.  0^  • 

Alaska  Me.  Pa.  'r^Atx-g.^  \v\Qk,v.M\\.OK. 

Ariz,  p^y  vTj  ^:i^a^     Mass.      >>-'^^,    P.  I.  =  Philippine 
Ark. 'ts-^  VvA^^    Md.Ha^^Vavj^-'  Islands 

Cal.clcK.\v?W^^^Cv  Mich.\\\c}^vQ^aw    P.  R.=  Porto  Rico 
Colo. ^^^Vc^vcx^c^    Minn.Hvv<wvi'QVovR.  I. 
ConnCovNY\G.cA\cc/\  MissN^^'>vs'^\  T^<<  ^  Samoa 
D.  C.t>\&kxn<r^:C^ov*^o.V\,^^soov\  S.  C.^ov.»V\j,  c 
Del.  VJ^V  ex ^^o.x  e.  Mont.  Vv t.^"^^^  ^ '    S.  D."        ' '     ■ 
Fla.~^Vcix  v^cv,      N.  C."Vio>-\VA  ,     ■    Tenn. "  siv^  a  . 
Ga.    Oe  o^ck^c-  N.  D.U^X'^^';^,Tex.       r-  :  \ 
H.  I.  =  Hawaiian        Neb.l^e\>xasv.c.'    Utah 

Islands  Nev.  Vi^^^cxo^rfx    Vt.  \]  ev  tv\(5a  Y' 

Id.  :L  00^  v^.q  N.  H.a^wa^A',U     Va.      "  '  '•  ^^''•■'  " 

111.  '^      -  N.  J.\\eu:i^'^--CM  Wash.  ^oa'~ 

Ind.  N.  M.>>,e'-soH^vv>\  Wis.         *'  \a 

la.  N.  Y.  ^Je»^iM.G  c  >:-;  W.  Va. 

Kan.  O.    C3V\\cb  Wyo.  ^sv4'•u^ 

Ky.  Ok.  > 

97.  In  technical  matter  (footnote  references,  bibliogra- 
phies, etc.),  "Company"  and  "Brothers,"  and  the 
word  "and"  (&  =" short  and"  or  "ampersand"),  in 
names  of  commercial  firms : 


34  The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 

The  Macmillan  Co.,  Macmillan  &  Co.,  Harper  Bros. ;  Chicago, 
Milwaukee  &  St.  Paul  Railroad. 

In  text  matter,  not  of  a  technical  character,  *' Com- 
pany" and  "Brothers"  may,  however,  be  spelled 
out: 

"Harper  Brothers  have  recently  published  ....;"    "The 
Century  Company  announces  ....;"   "The  extraordinary    1 
story  of  the  South  Sea  Company." 

98.  **  Saint "  before  a  name : 

St.  Louis,  St.  Peter's  Church,  SS.  Peter  and  Paul. 

"St."  should,  however,  preferably  be  omitted  in  con- 
nection with  the  names  of  apostles,  evangelists,  and 
church  fathers :  I 

Luke,  Paul,  Augustine;  not:  St.  Luke,  St.  Paul,  St.  Augustine. 

99.  In  references  to  Scripture  passages,  most  books  of 
the  Bible  having  more  than  one  syllable,  as  follows : 


Gen. 
Ex. 

Lev. 

Num. 

Deut. 

Josh. 

Judg. 

Ruth 

I  and  II  Sam. 

I  and  II  Kings 

I  and  II  Chron. 

Ezra 


OLD  TESTAMENT 

Neh. 

Hos. 

Esther 

Job 

Psalms  (Psalter) 

Prov. 

Eccles. 

Joel 

Am. 

Obad. 

Jonah 

Mic. 

Song  of  Sol. 
Isa. 

Nah. 
Hab. 

Jer. 

Lam. 
Ezek, 

Zeph. 

Hag. 

Zech. 

Dan.! 

Mai. 

Manual  of  S t  yl 

e :    Spelling 

35 

NEW  TESTAMENT 

Matt. 

Gal. 

Philem. 

Mark 

Eph. 

Heb. 

Luke 

Phil. 

Jas. 

John 

Col. 

I  and  II  Pet. 

Acts 

I  and  II  Thess. 

I,  II,  and  III  John 

Rom. 

I  and  II  Tim. 

Jude 

I  and  II  Cor. 

Titus 

APOCRYPHA 

Rev. 

I  and  II  Esd. 

Wisd.  of  Sol. 

Sus. 

Tob.=Tobit 

Ecclus. 

Bel  and  Dragon 

Jud.=  Judith 

Bar. 

Pr.  of  Man. 

Rest  of  Esther 

Song  of  Three 

I,   II,   III,   and   IV 

Children 

Mace. 

100.  In  literary  references,  in  footnotes  and  matter  of  a 
bibliographical  character,  '* volume,"  "number," 
"chapter,"  "article,"  "section,"  "page,"  "column," 
"verse,"  "line,"  "note,"  "figure,"  followed  by  their 
number  (see  33  and  218);  and  the  word  "follow- 
ing" after  the  number  to  denote  continuance: 

Vol.  I  (plural,  Vols.),  No.  i  (Nos.),  chap.  2  (chaps.),  Art.  Ill 
(Arts.),  sec.  4  (sees.),  p.  5  (pp.),  col.  6  (cols.),  vs.  7  (vss.), 
1.  8  (11.),  n.  9  (nn.);  pp.  5-7  (=pages  5  to  7  inclusive),  pp.  5,  6 
(  =  pages  5  and  6);  pp.  5f.  (=page  5  and  the  following  page), 
pp.  5  ff.  (=  pages  5  and  the  following  pages);  Fig.  7. 

Where  such  phrases  occur  in  isolated  instances  in 

the  text,  in  continuous  narrative  (and  not  inclosed  in 

parentheses),  it  is  often  preferable  to  spell  them  out, 

especially  if  beginning  a  sentence : 

"Volume  II  of  this  work  contains,  on  page  25,  a  reference 
to  ....  ;"  but:  "Volume  II  ...  .  contains  (p.  25)  .  .  .  ." 


36  The  University  oj  Chicago  Press 

1 01.  The  common  designations  of  weights  and  measures 

in  the  metric  system,  when  following  a  numeral : 

I  m.,  2  dm.,  3  cm.,  4  mm.;  cm.  (=cubic  meter),  c.d.,  c.c, 
c.mm.;  g.  (=gram;  gr.=  grain). 

General  Rules — 

102.  In  extracts  from  modem  authors  whose  spelling  and 
punctuation  differ  but  slightly  from  ours,  and  where 
such  variations  do  not  affect  the  meaning,  use  office 
style.  In  citations  from  Old  English  works,  and  in 
such  cases  where  it  appears  to  be  essential  to  the 
writer's  plan  or  the  requirements  of  the  context  to 
give  a  faithful  rendering,  follow  the  original  copy. 
Titles  should  always  be  accurately  quoted. 

103.  Form  possessive  of  proper  names  ending  in  s  or 
another  sibilant,  if  monosyllabic,  by  adding  an 
apostrophe  and  s;  if  of  more  than  one  syllable,  by 
adding  an  apostrophe  alone: 

King  James's  Version,  Burns's  poems,  Marx's  theories; 
Moses'  law,  Jesus'  birth,  Demosthenes'  .orations,  Berlioz' 
compositions;  for  convenience'  sake. 

104.  Before  sounded  h  and  long  w,  use  **a"  as  the  form 

of  the  indefinite  article : 

a  hotel,  a  harmonic,  a  historical,  a  union,  [a  euphonious  word, 
such  a  one]. 

105.  Do  not  use  ligature  cb  and  a?,  but  separate  the  letters, 
in  quotations  from  Latin ,  and  in  anglicized  derivatives 


Manual  o  j  Style:    Spelling 


37 


from  Latin,  or  from  Greek  through  Latin,  where  e 
has  not  been  substituted  for  the  diphthong: 

Aurea  prima  sata  est  aetasque,  vindice  nullo, 
sponte  sua,  sine  lege,  fidem  rectumque  colebat; 
poena  metusque  aberant  .... 

the  Aeneid,  Oedipus  Tyrannus,  Caesar,  aesthetic,  subpoena. 

In  quotations  from  Old  English,  and  from  French 
and  such  other  modern  languages  as  employ  it,  use 
the  ligature : 
Alfred,  AS  /iw«/e  =  "wheat;"  (Euvres  de  Balzac,  chef-d'oeuvre. 

1 06.  Differentiate  "farther"  and  "further"  by  using  the 
former  in  the  sense  of  "more  remote,"  "at  a  greater 
distance;"  the  latter  in  the  sense  of  "moreover," 
"in  addition": 

the  farther  end,  he  went  still  farther;  further  he  suggested,  a 
further  reason. 

107.  Spell: 


abridgment 

archaeology 

behavior 

castor  (roller) 

accouter 

ardor 

biased 

catechize 

acknowledgmeni 

t  armor 

blessed 

caviler 

adz 

artisan 

bowlder 

center 

aegis 

asbestos 

burned 

check 

Aeolian 

ascendency 

caesura 

chiseled 

aesthetic 

ascendent 

caliber 

chock-full 

afterward 

Athenaeum 

canceled 

clamor 

ambassador 

ax 

candor 

clinch 

amid 

aye 

cannoneer 

clue 

among 

bark  (vessel) 

cannot 

color 

anyone  (n.) 

barreled 

canon 

controller^ 

appareled 

bazaar 

carcass 

cotillon 

arbor 

Beduin 

caroled 

councilor 

'  In  official  publications  of  the  University  of  Chicago,  "comptroller." 


38 


The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 


counselor 

glycerin 

mediaeval 

Sanskrit 

cozy 

good-bye 

meter 

Savior 

criticize 

governor 

mileage 

savor 

cue 

graveled 

miter 

scathe 

cyclopedic 

gray 

modeled 

scepter 

defense 

gruesome 

Mohammedan 

sepulcher 

demarkation 

Gipsy 

mold 

sergeant 

demeanor 

haematoxylin 

molt 

Shakspere 

diarrhoea 

harbor 

moneyed 

skepticism 

disheveled 

hectare 

mortgager 

skilful 

disk 

hemorrhage 

movable 

smolder 

dispatch 

hindrance 

mustache 

somber 

distil 

Hindu 

neighbor 

someone  (n.) 

downward 

honor 

nomad 

specter 

draft 

horror 

odor 

staunch 

drought 

impale 

offense 

subpoena 

dueler 

impaneled 

paean 

succor 

dulness 

imperiled 

paleography 

sumac 

dwelt 

incase 

paleontology 

syrup 

embitter 

inclose 

paneled 

taboo 

emir 

incrust 

parceled 

talc 

encyclopedic 

incumbrance 

parole 

theater 

endeavor 

indorse 

parquet 

thraldom 

enfold 

ingraft 

partisan 

thrash 

engulf 

instal 

penciled 

today 

enrol 

instil 

Phoenix 

tomorrow 

ensnare 

insure 

plow 

tonight 

envelope  (n.) 

intrench 

practice  (n.  &  \ 

'.)tormentor 

enwrapped 

intrust 

pretense 

toward 

equaled 

jeweled 

primeval 

trammeled 

error 

Judea 

programme 

tranquilize 

Eskimo 

judgment 

pigmy 

traveler 

exhibitor 

kidnaper 

quarreled 

trousers 

fantasy 

Koran 

raveled 

tumor 

favor. 

labeled 

reconnoiter 

upward 

fetish 

labor 

reinforce 

valor 

fiber 

lacquer 

rencounter 

vapor 

flavor 

leveled 

reverie 

vendor 

focused 

libeled 

rigor 

vigor 

fulfil 

Uter 

rivaled 

whiskey 

fulness 

lodgment 

riveted 

wilful 

gauge 

maneuver , 

ruble 

woeful 

Galilean 

marshaled 

rumor 

woolen 

gaiety 

marvelous 

saber 

worshiper 

glamor 

meager 

salable 

Yahweh 

Manual  oj  Style:    Punctuation  39 


PUNCTUATION 

108.  All  punctuation  marks  should  be  printed  in  the  same 
type  as  the  word  or  letter  immediately  preceding 
them: 

"With  the  cry  of  Banzai!  the  regiment  stormed  the  hill;" 
Luke  4:16  a;  no.  i. 

Period — 

109.  A  period  is  used  to  indicate  the  end  of  a  complete 
sentence  (see,  however,  112). 

no.  Put  a  period  after  all  abbreviations,  except  in  cases 
where  a  mechanical  necessity  compels  the  omission 
of  a  letter  or  letters  in  the  middle  of  a  word  for  which 
there  is  no  recognized  abbreviated  form ;  such  omis- 
sion is  indicated  by  an  apostrophe.  Treat  "per 
cent."  and  the  metric  symbols  as  abbreviations,  but 
not  the  chemical  symbols,  nor  "format"  of  books: 

Macmillan  &  Co.,  Mr.  Smith,  St.  Paul,  no.  i,  Chas.  (see 
83),  ibid.,  s.  v.;  2  per  cent.,  10  mm.;  but:  m'f'g  pl't 
(= manufacturing  plant);  O,  Fe;  4to,  8vo 

Note. — With  respect  to  symbols  for  measures  the  following 
exceptions  should  be  noted:  Astrophysical  Journal,  12  mm 
(with  thin  space  and  no  period) ;  Botanical  Gazette,  12^1"^  125*^^ 
(superior,  with  hair-space);  Journal  0}  Geology,  12™™.  Astro- 
physical  Journal  uses  italics  for  chemical  s>Tnbols:  Fe. 

But  do  not  use  period,  in  technical  matter,  after  the 
recognized   abbreviations   for  linguistic  epochs,  or 


40  The   U  niv  er  sit  y  0  j  Chicago  Press 

for  titles  of  well-known  publications  of  which  the 
initials  only  are  given,  nor  after  MS  (  =  manuscript) : 
IE  ( =Indo-European),  OE  ( =  Old  English),  MHG  ( ^Middle 
High  German);  AJSL  {=  American  Journal  of  Semitic 
Languages  and  Literatures),  ZAW  (=Zeitschri}t  fur  alttesta- 
mentliche  Wissenschaft). 

111.  Use  no  period  after  Roman  numerals,  even  if  having 
the  value  of  ordinals : 

Vol.  IV;  Louis  XVI 

112.  Omit  the  period  after  running-heads  (for  explanation 
of  this  and  the  following  terms  see  260-64)  >  after 
centered  headlines;  after  side-heads  set  in  separate 
lines;  after  cut-in  heads;  after  box-heads  in  tables; 
and  after  superscriptions  and  legends  which  do  not 
form  a  complete  sentence  (with  subject  and  predi- 
cate) ;  after  date  lines  at  top  of  communications,  and 
after  signatures  (see  43). 

113.  The  period  is  placed  inside  the  quotation  marks; 

and  inside  the  parenthesis  when  the  matter  inclosed 

forms  no  part  of  the  preceding  sentence;  otherwise 

outside : 

Tennyson's  "In  Memoriam."  Put  the  period  inside  the 
quotation  marks.  (This  is  a  rule  without  exception.)  When 
the  parenthesis  forms  part  of  the  preceding  sentence,  put 
the  period  outside  (as,  for  instance,  here). 

Exclamation  Point— 

114.  The  exclamation  point  is  used  to  mark  an  outcry,  or 
an  emphatic  or  ironical  utterance : 


Manual  of  Style:    Punctuation  41 

"Long  live  the  king!"  "Heaven  forbid!"  "Good!"  he 
cried;  "  How  funny  this  seems ! "  " This  must  not  be ! "  The 
subject  of  his  lecture  was  "The  Thisness  of  the  That" !  The 
speaker  went  on:  "Nobody  should  leave  his  home  tomorrow 
without  a  marked  ballot  in  their  (!)  pocket." 

115.  The  exclamation  point  is  placed  inside  the  quotation 
marks  when  part  of  the  quotation ;  otherwise  outside. 
See  illustrations  in  114. 

Interrogation  Point — 

116.  The  interrogation  point  is  used  to  mark  a  query,  or 
to  express  a  doubt : 

"Who  is  this  ?  "  The  prisoner  gave  his  name  as  Roger  Crown  • 
inshield,  the  son  of  an  English  baronet  ( ?). 

Indirect  questions,  however,  should  not  be  followed 
by  an  interrogation  point: 
He  asked  whether  he  was  ill. 

117.  The  interrogation  point  should  be  placed  inside  the 
quotation  marks  only  when  it  is  a  part  of  the  quota- 
tion: 

The  question:  "Who  is  who,  and  what  is  what?"  Were 
you  ever  in  "Tsintsinnati"  ? 

Colon — 

118.  The  colon  is  used  to  ''mark  a  discontinuity  of 
grammatical  construction  greater  than  that  indicated 
by  the  semicolon  and  less  than  that  indicated  by  the 
period.  It  is  commonly  used  (i)  to  emphasize  a 
close  connection  in  thought  between  two  clauses  of 
which  each  forms  a  complete  sentence,  and  which 


42  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

might  with  grammatical  propriety  be  separated  by 
a  period;  (2)  to  separate  a  clause  which  is  gram- 
matically complete  from  a  second  which  contains 
an  illustration  or  amplification  of  its  meaning;  (3) 
to  introduce  a  formal  statement,  an  extract,  a  speech 
in  a  dialogue,  etc."  (Century  Dictionary) y  (unless 
this  is  preceded  by  a  conjunction,  like  "that," 
immediately  connecting  it  with  what  goes  before). 
Before  the  quotation  of  a  clause  in  the  middle  of  a 
sentence  use  a  comma: 

(i)  "This  argument  undeniably  contains  some  force:  Thus 
it  is  well  known  that  .  .  .  ."  "The  secretion  of  the  gland 
goes  on  uninterruptedly:  this  may  account  for  the  condition 
of  the  organ."  "The  fear  of  death  is  universal:  even  the 
lowest  animals  instinctively  shrink  from  annihilation."  (2) ' 
"Most  countries  have  a  national  flower:  France  the  lily, 
England  the  rose,  etc."  "Lambert  pine:  the  gigantic  sugar 
pine  of  California."  (3)  "The  rule  may  be  stated  thus: 
.  .  .  ."  "We  quote  from  the  address:  .  .  .  ."  "Charles: 
'Where  are  you  going?'  George:  *To  the  mill-pond.*" 
But:  "He  stoutly  maintained  that  'the  letter  was  a  mon- 
strous forgery; ' "  and:  "Declaring, ' The  letter  is  a  monstrous 
forgery,'  he  tried  to  wash  his  hands  of  the  whole  affair," 

119.  The  colon  thus  often  takes  the  place  of  an  implied 
"namely,"  "as  follows,"  "for  instance,"  or  a  similar 
phrase.  Where  such  word  or  phrase  is  used,  it 
should  be  followed  by  a  colon  if  what  follows  consists 
of  one  or  more  grammatically  complete  clauses; 
otherwise*  by  a  comma  (see  132) : 


Manual  oj  Style:    Punctuation  43 

"This  is  true  of  only  two  nations — the  wealthiest,  though  not 
the  largest,  in  Europe:  Great  Britain  and  France;"  but:  "This 
is  true  of  only  two  nations — the  wealthiest,  though  not  the 
largest,  in  Europe — viz..  Great  Britain  and  France."  "He 
made  several  absurd  statements.  For  example:  .  .  .  .;" 
but:  "There  are  several  states  in  the  Union — for  instance, 
Kansas  and  Wyoming — which  .  .  .  ." 

120.  Put  a  colon  after  the  salutatory  phrase  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  letter,  and  after  the  introductory  remark 
of  a  speaker  addressing  the  chairman  or  the  audience : 

My  dear  Mr.  Brown:    (See  43.) 

Mr.  Chairman,  Ladies  and  Gentlemen:    (See  54.) 

121.  Put  a  colon  between  chapter  and  verse  in  Scripture 
passages,  and  between  hours  and  minutes  in  time 
indications : 

Matt.  2:5-13;  4:30  P.M. 

122.  Put  a  colon  between  the  place  of  publication  and 
the  publisher's  name  in  literary  references : 
Clement  oj  Alexandria  (London:  Macmillan),  II,  97. 

123.  The  colon  should  be  placed  outside  the  quotation 
marks,  unless  a  part  of  the  quotation : 

He  writes  under  the  head  of  "Notes  and  Comments": 
"Many  a  man  has  had  occasion  to  testify  to  the  truth  of  the 
old  adage:"  etc. 

Semicolon — 

124.  A  semicolon  is  used  to  mark  the  division  of  a  sentence 
somewhat  more  independent  than  that  marked  by 
a  comma: 


44  The   University  o  j  Chicago  Press 

"Are  we  giving  our  lives  to  perpetuate  the  things  that  the 
past  has  created  for  its  needs,  forgetting  to  ask  whether  these 
things  still  serve  today's  needs;  or  are  we  thinking  of  living 
men  ? "  "This  is  as  important  for  science  as  it  is  for  practice ; 
indeed,  it  may  be  said  to  be  the  only  important  consideration." 
"It  is  so  in  war;  it  is  so  in  the  economic  life;  it  cannot  be 
otherwise  in  religion."  "Let  us  not  enter  into  this  now; 
let  us,  rather,  ask  what  the  significance  of  our  departed  friend 
has  been  for  his  generation,  not  as  a  soldier  and  statesman, 
but  as  a  philosopher  and  writer;  not  as  an  administrator 
and  an  organizer,  but  as  the  standard-bearer  of  civic  right 
eousness."  "In  Russia  the  final  decision  rests  with  the  Czar, 
advised  by  his  ministers;  in  most  constitutional  countries, 
indirectly  with  the  people  as  represented  in  parliament;  in 
Switzerland  alone,  through  the  referendum,  directly  with  the 
electorate  at  large."  "  This,  let  it  be  remembered,  was  the 
ground  taken  by  Mill;  for  to  him  ^utilitarianism,'  in  spite 
of  all  his  critics  may  say,  did  not  mean  the  pursuit  of  bodily 
pleasure."  ("For"  in  such  cases  should  commonly  be 
preceded  by  a  semicolon.) 

125.  In  enumerations  use  a  semicolon  between  the  differ- 
ent links,  if  these  consist  of  more  than  a  few  words 
closely  connected,  and  especially  if  individual  clauses 
contain  any  punctuation  mark  of  less  value  than  a 
period,  or  an  exclamation  or  interrogation  point 
(unless  inclosed  in  parentheses),  yet  are  intimately 
joined  one  with  the  other,  and  all  with  the  sentence 
or  clause  leading  up  to  them,  for  instance  through 
dependence  upon  a  conjunction,  like  "that,'*  pre- 
ceding them  (see  32) : 


Manual  oj  Style:    Punctuation  45 

"The  membership  of  the  international  commission  was  made 
up  as  follows:  France,  4;  Germany,  5;  Great  Britain,  i 
(owing  to  a  misunderstanding,  the  announcement  did  not 
reach  the  English  societies  in  time  to  secure  a  full  quota  from 
that  country.  Sir  Henry  Campbell,  who  had  the  matter  in 
charge,  being  absent  at  the  time,  great  difficulty  was  experi- 
enced in  arousing  sufficient  interest  to  insure  the  sending  of 
even  a  solitary  delegate);  Italy,  3;  the  United  States,  7." 
"The  defendant,  in  justification  of  his  act,  pleaded  that  (i) 
he  was  despondent  over  the  loss  of  his  wife;  (2)  he  was  out 
of  work;  (3)  he  had  had  nothing  to  eat  for  two  days;  (4)  he 
was  under  the  influence  of  liquor."  "Presidents  Hadley,  of 
Yale;  Eliot,  of  Harvard;  Butler,  of  Columbia;  and  Angell, 
of  Michigan."  "Smith  was  elected  president;  Jones,  vice- 
president;   Miller,  secretary;   and  Anderson,  treasurer." 

126.  In  Scripture  references  a  semicolon  is  used  to 
separate  passages  containing  chapters : 

Gen.  2:3-6,  9,  14;  3:17;  chap.  5;  6:15. 

127.  The  semicolon  is  always  placed  inside  the  quotation 
marks. 

Comma — 

128.  The  com.ma  is  ''used  to  indicate  the  smallest  inter- 
niptions  in  continuity  of  thought  or  grammatical 
construction,  the  marking  of  which  contributes  to 
clearness"  {Century  Dictionary) : 

"Here,  as  in  many  other  cases,  what  is  sometimes  popularly 
supposed  to  be  orthodox  is  really  a  heresy,  an  exaggeration, 
a  distortion,  a  caricature  of  the  true  doctrine  of  the  church. 
The  doctrine  is,  indeed,  laid  down  by  an  authority  here  and 


46  The   University  o j  Chicago  Press 

there;  but,  speaking  generally,  it  has  no  place  in  the  stand- 
ards, creeds,  or  confessions  of  the  great  communions;  e.  g., 
the  Apostles'  Creed,  the  Nicene  Creed,  the  canons  of  the  early 
ecumenical  councils,  the  Westminster  Confession,  the  Thirty- 
nine  Articles."  "Shakspere  and  other,  lesser,  poets."  **The 
books  which  I  have  read  I  herewith  return"  (i.  e.j  I  return 
those  [only]  which  I  have  read);  but:  "The  books^  which  I 
have  read,  I  herewith  return"  (i.e.,  having  read  them  [all], 
I  now  return  them).  "Gossiping,  women  are  happy;"  and: 
"Gossiping  women  are  happy."  "Of  these  four,  two  Ameri- 
cans and  one  Englishman,  started;"  and:  "Of  these,  four — 
two  Americans  and  two  Englishmen — started."  "The  suffer- 
ing, God  will  relieve."  "Behind,  her  'stage  mother'  stood 
fluttering  with  extra  wraps."  "About  [the  year]  1840, 
daughters  of  self-respecting  Americans  worked  in  cotton- 
mills."  "Some  boys  and  girls  prematurely  announce  them- 
selves, usually  in  uncomfortable,  sometimes  in  bad,  ways." 
"And,  as  I  believe,  we  are  beginning  to  see  with  clearer,  and 
I  hope  with  finer,  vision."  "This  is,  at  least  to  some  extent, 
true  of  everyone." 

129.  Use  a  comma  to  separate  proper  nouns  belonging 

to  different  individuals  or  places : 

"To  John,  Smith  was  always  kind;"  "To  America,  Europe 
awards  the  prize  of  mechanical  skill." 

130.  Put   a   comma  before   "and,"   "or,"   and   "nor" 

connecting  the  last  tv^o  links  in  a  sequence  of  three 

or  more;  or  all  the  links  in  a  series  of  greater  length, 

or  where  each  individual  link  consists  of  several 

words;  always  put  a  comma  before  " etc." : 

Tom,  Dick,  and  Harry;  either  copper,  silver,  or  gold;  "He 
was  equally  familiar    with    Homer,  and    Shakspere,    and 


Manual  of  Style:    Punctuation  47 

V  Moli^re,  and  Cervantes,  and  Goethe,  and  Ibsen;"  "Neither 
France  for  her  art,  nor  Germany  for  her  army,  nor  England 
for  her  democracy,  etc." 

But  do  not  use  a  comma  where  ''and,"  etc.,  serves 
to  connect  all  of  the  links  in  a  brief  and  close-knit 
phrase : 

a  man  good  and  noble  and  true;  "I  do  not  remember  who 
wrote  the  stanza — whether  it  was  Shelley  or  Keats  or  Moore." 

131.  Ordinarily,  put  a  comma  before  and  after  clauses 
introduced  by  such  conjunctions  as  "and,"  "but," 
"if,"  "while,"  "as,"  "whereas,"  "since,"  "because," 
"when,"  "after,"  "although,"  etc.,  especially  if  a 
change  of  subject  takes  place  : 

"When  he  arrived  at  the  railway  station,  the  train  had  gone, 
and  his  friend,  who  had  come  to  bid  him  good-bye,  had 
departed,  but  left  no  word.  As  the  next  train  was  not  due 
for  two  hours,  he  decided  to  take  a  ride  about  the  town, 
although  it  offered  httle  of  interest  to  the  sightseer.  While 
he  regretted  his  failure  to  meet  his  friend,  he  did  not  go 
to  his  house,  because  he  did  not  wish  to  inconvenience  his 
wife,  if  it  were  true  that  she  was  ill." 

But  do  not  use  a  comma  before  clauses  introduced 

by  such  conjunctions,  if  the  preceding  clause  is  not 

logically  complete  without  them;   nor  before  "if," 

"but,"  and  "though"  in  brief  and  close-welded 

phrases : 

"This  is  especially  interesting  because  they  represent  the  two 
extremes,  and  because  they  present  differences  in  their  rela- 
tions;"  "This  is  good  because  true;"   "I  shall  agree  to  this 


48       The  University  0  j  Chicago  Press 

only  if  you  accept  my  conditions;"  "I  would  not  if  I  could, 
and  could  not  if  I  would;"  "He  left  school  when  he  was 
twelve  years  old;"  "honest  though  poor;"  "a  cheap  but 
valuable  book." 

132.  Such  conjunctions,  adverbs,  connective  particles,  or 
phrases  as  "now,''  "then,"  "however,"  "indeed," 
"therefore,"  "moreover,"  "furthermore,"  "never- 
theless," "though,"  "in  fact,"  "in  short,"  "for 
instance,"  "that  is,"  "of  course,"  "on  the  contrary," 
"on  the  other  hand,"  "after  all,"  "to  be  sure," 
etc.,  should  be  followed  by  a  comma  when  stand- 
ing at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  or  clause  to 
introduce  an  inference  or  an  explanation,  and  should 
be  placed  between  commas  when  wedged  into  the 
middle  of  a  sentence  or  clause  to  mark  off  a  distinct 
break  in  the  continuity  of  thought  or  structure, 
indicating  a  summarizing  of  what  precedes,  the  point 
of  a  new  departure,  or  a  modifying,  restrictive,  or 
antithetical  addition,  etc. : 

"Indeed,  this  was  exactly  the  point  of  the  argument;" 
"Moreover,  he  did  not  think  it  feasible;"  "Now,  the  question 
'is  this:  .  .  .  .  "  "Nevertheless,  he  consented  to  the 
scheme;"  "In  fact,  rather  the  reverse  is  true;"  "This,  then, 
is  my  position :  ....;"  "The  statement,  therefore,  cannot 
be  verified;"  "He  thought,  however,  that  he  would  like  to 
try;"  "That,  after  all,  seemed  a  trivial  matter;"  "The  gen- 
tleman, of  course,  was  wrong." 

But  do  not  use  a  conama  with  such  words  when  the 
connection  is  logically  close  and  structurally  smooth 


M  anual  0  I  S  t  yl  e  :    Punctuation  49 

enough  not  to  call  for  any  pause  in  reading;   with 

**  therefore,"    *' nevertheless,"    etc.,    when    directly 

following  the  verb;    with  "indeed"  when  directly 

preceding   or   following   an    adjective   or   another 

adverb  which  it  qualifies;   nor  ordinarily  with  such 

terms  as  ''perhaps,"  "also,"  "likewise,"  etc.: 

"Therefore  I  say  unto  you  ....;"  "He  was  therefore 
unable  to  be  present;"  "It  is  nevertheless  true;"  "He  is 
recovering  very  slowly  indeed;"  "He  was  perhaps  thinking 
of  the  future;"  "This  is  likewise  true  of  the  army;"  "He 
was  a  scholar  and  a  sportsman  too." 

133.  If  among  several  adjectives  preceding  a  noun  the 
last  bears  a  more  direct  relation  to  the  noun  than  the 
others,  it  should  not  be  preceded  by  a  comma : 

"the  admirable  political  institutions  of  the  country;"  "a  hand- 
some, wealthy  young  man." 

134.  Participial  clauses,  especially  such   as  contain  an 

explanation  of  the  main  clause,  should  usually  be 

set  off  by  a  comma : 

"Being  asleep,  he  did  not  hear  him;"  "Exhausted  by  a  hard 
day's  work,  he  slept  like  a  stone." 

135.  Put  a  comma  before  "not"  introducing  an  anti- 
thetical clause: 

"Men  addict  themselves  to  inferior  pleasures,  not  because 
they  deliberately  prefer  them,  but  because  they  are  the  only 
ones  to  which  they  have  access. " 

136.  For  parenthetical,  adverbial,  or  appositional  clauses 
or   phrases   use   commas   to   indicate   structurally 


5o  The  University  o  j  Chicago  Press 

disconnected,  but  logically  integral,  interpolations; 

dashes  to  indicate  both  structurally  and  logically 

disconnected  insertions ;  never  use  the  two  together 

(see  159)- 

"  Since,  from  the  naturalistic  point  of  view,  mental  states  are 
the  concomitants  of  physiological  processes  ....;""  The 
French,  generally  speaking,  are  a  nation  of  artists;"  "The 
English,  highly  democratic  as  they  are,  nevertheless  deem 
the  nobility  one  of  the  fundamentals  of  their  political  and 
social  systems." 

137.  Use  a  comma  to  separate  two  identical  or  closely 
similar  words,  even  if  the  sense  or  grammatical  con- 
struction does  not  require  such  separation  (see  129): 

"Whatever  is,  is  good;"  "What  he  was,  is  not  known;" 
"The  chief  aim  of  academic  striving  ought  not  to  be,  to  be 
most  in  evidence;"  "This  is  unique  only  in  this,  that  .  .  .  ." 

138.  In  adjectival  phrases,  a  complementary,  qualifying, 

delimiting,  or  antithetical  adjective  added  to  the 

main  epithet  preceding  a  noun  should  be  preceded 

and  followed  by  a  comma: 

"This  harsh,  though  perfectly  logical,  conclusion;"  "The 
deceased  was  a  stem  and  unapproachable,  yet  withal  sym- 
pathetic and  kind-hearted,  gentleman;"  "Here  comes  in  the 
most  responsible,  because  it  is  the  final,  ojfice  of  the  teacher;" 
"The  most  sensitive,  if  not  the  most  elusive,  part  of  the 
training  of  children  .  .  .  .;"  "He  always  bought  the  very 
best,  or  at  least  the  most  expensive,  articles." 

139.  Two  or  more  co-ordinate  clauses  ending  in  a  word 


Manual  of  Style:    Punctuation  51 

governing  or  modifying  another  word  in  a  following 

clause  should  be  separated  by  commas : 

" .  .  .  .a  shallow  body  of  water  connected  with,  but  well 
protected  from,  the  open  sea;"  "He  was  as  tall  as,  though  much 
younger  than,  his  brother;"  "The  cultivation  in  ourselves  of 
a  sensitive  feeling  on  the  subject  of  veracity  is  one  of  the 
most  useful,  and  the  enfeeblement  of  that  feeling  one  of  the 
most  hurtful,  things  to  which  our  conduct  can  be  instru- 
mental;" "This  road  leads  away  from,  rather  than  toward, 
your  destination." 

140.  Similarly,  use  a  comma  to  separate  two  numbers: 

"In  1905,  347  teachers  attended  the  convention;  "  November 
I,  1905  (see  144). 

141.  A  comma  is  employed  to  indicate  the  omission,  for 
brevity  or  convenience,  of  a  word  or  words,  the 
repetition  of  which  is  not  essential  to  the  meaning : 

"In  Illinois  there  are  seventeen  such  institutions;  in  Ohio, 
twenty-two;  in  Indiana,  thirteen;"  "In  Lincoln's  first  cabinet 
Seward  was  secretary  of  state;  Chase,  of  the  treasury; 
Cameron,  of  war;  and  Bates,  attorney-general. " 

Often,  however,   such    constructions    are    smooth 

enough  not  to  call  for  commas  (and  consequent 

semicolons) : 

"One  puppy  may  resemble  the  father,  another  the  mother, 
and  a  third  some  distant  ancestor." 

142.  Use  a  comma  before  ''of"  in  connection  with  resi- 
dence or  position : 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Mclntyre,  of  Detroit,  Mich.;  President  Hadley, 
of  Yale  University. 


52  The  University  o  j  Chicago  Press 

Exceptions  are  those  cases,  historical  and  political,  in 

which  the  place-name  practically  has  become  a  part 

of  the  person's  name,  or  is  so  closely  connected  with 

this  as  to  render  the  separation  artificial  or  illogical : 

Clement  of  Alexandria,  Philip  of  Anjou,  King  Edward  of 
England. 

143.  Put    a   comma   between    two    consecutive   pages, 
verses,  etc. ;  and  after  digits  indicating  thousands : 
pp.  5,  6  (not:  5H3);  1,276,  10,419. 

144.  Separate  month  and  year,  and  similar  time  divisions, 

by  a  comma: 

November,  1905;  New  Year's  Day,  1906. 

Note. — Astrophysical  Journal  and  Botanical  Gazette  do  not 
use  a  comma  with  four  figures,  nor  between  month  and  year, 

145.  Omit  the  comma,  in  signatures  and  at  the  beginning 

of  articles,  after  author's  name  followed  by  address, 

title,  or  position  in  a  separate  line,  or  after  address 

followed  by  a  date  line,  etc. : 

James  P.  Robinson 
Superintendent  of  Schools,  Bird  Center,  111. 

James  P.  Robinson 

Superintendent  of  Schools 
Bird  Center,  III. 
July  I,  1906 

146.  The  comma  is  always  placed  inside  the  quotation 
marks. 

Apostrophe — 

147.  An  apostrophe  is  used  to  mark  the  omission  of  a 


Manual  of  Style:    Punctuation  53 

letter  or  letters  in  the  contraction  of  a  word,  or  of 

figures  in  a  number : 

ne'er,  don't,  'twas,  "takin'  me  'at;"  m'f'g;  the  class  of  '96 
(see  no). 

148.  The  possessive  case  of  nouns,  common  and  proper, 

is  formed  by  the  addition  of  an  apostrophe,  or 

apostrophe  and  s  (see  103): 

a  man's,  horses'  tails;  Scott's  IvanhoCy  Jones's  farm,  Themis- 
tocles'  era;  for  appearance'  sake. 

149.  The  plural  of  numerals,  and  of  rare  or  artificial  noun- 
coinages,  is  formed  by  the  aid  of  an  apostrophe  and 
s;  of  proper  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  ending 
in  a  sibilant,  by  adding  an  apostrophe  alone  (mono- 
syllabic proper  names  ending  in  a  sibilant  add  es; 
others,  s) : 

in  the  1900's;  in  two's  and  three's,  the  three  R's,  the 
Y.  M.  C.  A.'s;  "these  I-just-do-as-I-please's;"  "all  the 
Tommy  Atkins' of  England"  (but:  the  Rosses  and  the  Mac- 
Dougalls). 

Quotation  Marks  (see  section  on  "Quotations,"  64-81). 

Dashes — 

150.  A  dash  is  used  to  denote  *'a  sudden  break,  stop,  or 

transition  in  a  sentence,  or  an  abrupt  change  in  its 

construction,   a  long  or  significant   pause,   or  an 

unexpected   or    epigrammatic   turn  of  sentiment'* 

(John  Wilson) : 

"Do  we — can  we — send  out  educated  boys  and  girls  from  the 
high  school  at  eighteen  ? "     "The  Platonic  world  of  the  static. 


54  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

and  the  Hegelian  world  of  process — how  great  the  contrast!" 
"  '  Process' — that  is  the  magic  word  of  the  modem  period;" 
"To  be  or  not  to  be — that  is  the  question;"  "Christianity 
found  in  the  Roman  Empire  a  civic  life  which  was  implicated 
by  a  thousand  roots  with  pagan  faith  and  cultus — a  state 
which  ofifered  little  .  .  .  .;"  "Care  for  the  salvation  of  the 
soul,  anxiety  for  its  purity,  expectation  for  the  speedy  end 
of  the  world — these  overbore  interest  in  moral  society;" 
"This  giving-out  is  but  a  phase  of  the  taking-in — a  natural 
and  inevitable  reaction;"  "The  advocates  of  this  theory 
require  exposure — long-time!"  "Full  of  vigor  and  enthu- 
siasm and — mince  pie." 

151.  Use  dashes  (rarely  parentheses — see  161)  for  paren- 
thetical clauses  which  are  both  logically  and  struc- 
turally independent  interpolations  (see  136): 

"This  may  be  said  to  be — ^but,  never  mind,  we  will  pass  over 
that;"  "  'God,  give  us  men!  A  time  like  this  demands 
strong  minds,  great  hearts' — I  have  forgotten  the  rest;" 
"There  came  a  time — let  us  say,  for  convenience,  with 
Herodotus  and  Thucydides — when  this  attention  to  actions 
was  conscious  and  deliberate;"  "If  it  be  asked — and  in  say- 
ing this  I  but  epitomize  my  whole  contention — why  the 
Mohammedan  religion  .  .  .  ." 

152.  A  clause  added  to  lend  emphasis  to,  or  to  explain  or 
expand,  a  word  or  phrase  occurring  in  the  main 
clause,  which  word  or  phrase  is  then  repeated, 
should  be  introduced  by  a  dash : 

"To  him  they  are  more  important  as  the  sources  for  history — 
the  history  of  events  and  ideas;"  "Here  we  are  face  to  face 
with  a  new  and  difficult  problem — new  and  difficult,  that  is, 
in  the  sense  that  .  .  .  ." 


Manual  of  Style:    Punctuation  55 

153.  Wherever  a  "namely"  is  implied  before  a  paren- 
thetical or  complementary  clause,  a  dash  should 
preferably  be  used  (see  119): 

"These  discoveries — gunpowder,  printing-press,  compass, 
and  telescope — were  the  weapons  before  which  the  old  science 
trembled ; "  "But  here  we  are  trenching  upon  another  division 
of  our  field — the  interpretation  of  New  Testament  books." 

154.  In  sentences  broken  up  into  clauses,  the  final — 
summarizing — clause  should  be  preceded  by  a  dash : 

"Amos,  with  the  idea  that  Jehovah  is  an  upright  judge 
.  .  .  .  ;  Hosea,  whose  Master  hated  injustice  and  falsehood 
.  .  .  .  ;  Isaiah,  whose  Lord  would  have  mercy  only  on  those 
who  relieved  the  widow  and  the  fatherless — these  were  the 
spokesmen  .  .  .  ." 

155*   A  word  or  phrase  set  in  a  separate  line  and  succeeded 

by  paragraphs,  at  the  beginning  of  each  of  which  it 

is  implied,  should  be  followed  by  a  dash : 

"I  recommend — 
"i.   That  we  kill  him. 
"2.   That  we  flay  him." 

156.  A  dash  should  be  used  in  connection  with  side-heads, 
whether  ''run  in"  or  paragraphed: 

2.   The  language  of  the  New  Testatneni. — The  lexicons 
of  Grimm-Thayer,  Cremer,  and  others  .... 

Note. — The  above  statement  has  been  taken  from  .... 

Biblical  Criticism  in  the  Church  of  England  — 

A  most  interesting  article  appeared  in  the  Expository 
Times  .... 


56  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

157.  Use  a  dash  for  ''to"  connecting  two  words  or  num- 
bers: 

May-July,  1906  (en-dash);  May  i,  1905 — November  i,  1906 
(em-dash);  pp.  3-7  (en-dash);  Luke  3:6 — 5:2  (em-dash). 

In  connecting  consecutive  numbers,  omit  hundreds 

from  the  second  number — i.  e.,  use  only  two  figures 

— unless  the  first  number  ends   in  two  ciphers,  in 

which  case  repeat;  if  the  next  to  the  last  figure  in 

the  first  number  is  a  cipher,  do  not  repeat  this  in  the 

second  number : 

1880-95,  pp.  1 13-16;  1900-1906,  pp.  102-7. 

Note. — The  Astrophysicai  Journal  repeats  the  hundreds:  1880- 
1895,  pp.  113-116. 

158.  Let  a  dash  precede  the  reference  (author,  title  of 

work,  or  both)  following  a  direct  quotation,  consisting 

of  at  least  one  complete  sentence,  in  footnotes  or 

cited  independently  in  the  text  (see  75) : 

^  "I  felt  an  emotion  of  the  moral  sublime  at  beholding 
such  an  instance  of  civic  heroism." — Thirty  Years,  I,  379. 

The  green  grass  is  growing, 

The  morning  wind  is  in  it, 
'Tis  a  tune  worth  the  knowing, 

Though  it  change  every  minute. 

—Emerson,  "To  Ellen,  at  the  South." 

159.  A  dash  should  not  ordinarily  be  used  in  connection 

with  any  other  point,  except  a  period : 

"Dear  Sir:  I  have  the  honor  .  .  .  .  ;"  not:  "Dear  Sir:— 
I  have  .  .  .  ."  "This — I  say  it  with  regret — was  not  done;" 
not:  "This, — I  say  it  with  regret, — was  .  .  .  ." 


Manual  oj  Style:    Punctuation  57 

Parentheses — 

160.  Place  between  parentheses  figures  or  letters  used  to 

mark  divisions  in  enumerations  run  into  the  text:^, 

"The  reasons  for  his  resignation  were  three:  (i)  advanced 
age,  (2)  failing  health,  (3)  a  desire  to  travel." 

If  such  divisions  are  paragraphed,  a  single  paren- 
thesis is  ordinarily  used  in  connection  with  a  lower- 
case (italic)  letter;  a  period,  with  figures  and  capital 
(roman)  letters.  In  syllabi,  and  matter  of  a  similar 
character,  the  following  scheme  of  notation  and  in- 
dention of  subdivisions  should  ordinarily  be  adhered 
to: 

A.  Under  the  head  of  .  .      . 

I.  Under  .... 

1.  Under  .... 

a)  Under  .... 

(i)  Under  .... 
(a)  Under  .... 
a)  Under  .... 
/3)  Under  .... 
(6)  Under  .... 
(2)  Under  .... 

b)  Under  .... 

2.  Under  .... 

II.  Under  .  ,   .  .> 

B.  Under  the  head  of  ...  . 

% 

161.  Parentheses  should  not  ordinarily  be  used  for  paren- 
thetical clauses  (see  136  and  151),  unless  confusion 
might  arise  from  the  use  of  less  distinctive  marks,  or 


58  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

unless  the  contents  of  the  clause  is  wholly  irrelevant 

to  the  main  argument: 

"He  meant — I  take  this  to  be  the  (somewhat  obscure)  sense 
of  his  speech — that  .  .  .  .  ;"  "The  period  thus  inaugurated 
(of  which  I  shall  speak  at  greater  length  in  the  next  chapter) 
was  characterized  by  .  .  .  .  ;"  "The  contention  has  been 
made  {op.  cit.)  that  .  .  .  ." 

Brackets — 

162.  Brackets  are  used  to  inclose  an  explanation  or  note, 
to  indicate  an  interpolation  in  a  quotation,  to  rectify 
a  mistake,  to  supply  an  omission,  and  for  a  paren- 
thesis within  a  parenthesis : 

^  [This  was  written  before  the  publication  of  Spencer's 
book. — Editor.] 

"These  [the  free-silver  Democrats]  asserted  that  the 
present  artificial  ratio  can  be  maintained  indefinitely." 

John  Ruskin.  By  Henry  Carpenter.  ["English  Men  of 
Letters,"  IH.]    London:   Black,  1900. 

"As  the  Italian  [Englishman]  Dante  Gabriel  Ros[s]etti 
has  said,  .  .  .  ." 

Deut.  3:46  [5]- 

Grote,  the  great  historian  of  Greece  (see  his  History,  I, 
204  [second  edition]),  .... 

163.  Such  phrases  as  ^' Continuedy^^  ^^To  he  continuedy^ 
etc.,  at  the  beginning  and  end  of  articles,  chapters, 
etc.,  should  be  placed  between  brackets  (and  set 
in  italics — see  63) ; 

[Continued  from  p.  j2o] 
[To  be  concluded] 


Manual  of  Style:    Punctuation  59 

Ellipses — 

164.  Ellipses  are  used  to  indicate  the  omission  of  one  or 
more  words  not  essential  to  the  idea  which  it  is 
desired  to  convey.  For  an  ellipsis  at  the  beginning, 
in  the  middle,  or  at  the  end  of  a  sentence  four  periods, 
separated  by  a  space  (en- quad),  should  ordinarily 
be  used,  except  in  very  narrow  measures.  If  the 
preceding  line  ends  in  a  point,  this  should  not  be 
included  in  the  four.  Where  a  whole  paragraph,  or 
paragraphs,  or,  in  poetry,  a  complete  line,  or  lines, 
are  omitted,  insert  a  full  line  of  periods,  separated 
by  em-  or  2 -em  quads,  according  to  the  length  of 
the  line : 

The  point  ....  is  that  the  same  forces  ....  are  still 

the  undercurrents  of  every  human  life We  may  never 

unravel  the  methods  of  the  physical  forces;  ....  but  .... 

I  think  it  worth  giving  you  these  details,  because  it  is  a 
vague  thing,  though  a  perfectly  true  thing,  to  say  that  it  was 
by  his  genius  that  Alexander  conquered  the  eastern  world. 

His  army,  you  know,  was  a  small  one.  To  carry  a  vast 
number  of  men  .... 

....  he  sought  the  lumberer's  gang, 

Where  from  a  hundred  lakes  young  rivers  sprang; 

Through  these  green  tents,  by  eldest  nature  drest, 
He  roamed,  content  alike  with  man  and  beast. 

165.  An  ellipsis  should  be  treated  as  a  part  of  the  citation; 


6o  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

consequently  should  be  inclosed  in  the  quotation 
marks  (see  above). 

Hyphens — 

1 66.  A  hyphen  is  placed  at  the  end  of  a  line  terminating 
with  a  syllable  of  a  word,  the  remainder  of  which 
is  carried  to  the  next  line  (see  section  on  "  Divisions  ") ; 
and  between  many  compound  words. 

167.  Hyphenate  two  or  more  words  (except  proper  names 

forming  a  unity  in  themselves)  combined  into  one 

adjective  preceding  a  noun: 

so-called  Croesus,  well-known  author,  first-class  investment, 
better-trained  teachers,  high-school  course,  half-dead  horse, 
never-ceasing  strife,  much-mooted  question,  joint-stock  com- 
pany, EngHsh-speaking  peoples,  nineteenth-century  progress, 
white-rat  sermn,  up-to-date  machinery,  four-year-old  boy, 
house-to-house  canvass,  go-as-you-please  fashion,  deceased- 
wife's-sister  bill;  but:  New  Testament  times.  Old  English 
spelling. 

Where  such  words  are  set  in  capitals  (e.  g.,  in  head- 
lines), or  where  one  of  the  components  contains  more 
than  one  word,  an  en-dash  should  be  used  in  place 
of  a  hyphen  : 

FRANCO-PRUSSIAN  WAR;  New  York-Chicago  freight 
traffic. 

But  do  not  connect  by  a  hyphen  adjectives  or  par- 
ticiples with   adverbs  ending  in   "-ly;"    nr      .u-' 
combinations  as  the  above  when  following  uic  n  >uiij 
or  qualifying  a  predicate : 


Manual  oj  Style:    Pic  net  nation  6i 

highly  developed  species;  a  man  well  known  in  the  neighbor- 
hood; the  fly-leaf,  so  called;  "Her  gown  and  carriage  were 
strictly  up  to  date." 

1 68.  Hyphenate,  as  a  rule,  nouns  formed  by  the  combina- 
tion of  two  noims  standing  in  objective  relation  to 
each  other — that  is,  one  of  whose  components  is  de- 
rived from  a  transitive  verb : 

mind-reader,  story-teller,  fool-killer,  office-holder,  well-wisher, 
evil-doer,  property -owner;  hero-worship,  child-study;  wood- 
turning,  clay-modeling. 

Exceptions  are  such  common  and  brief  compounds 

as — 

lawgiver,  taxpayer,  proofreader,  bookkeeper,  stockholder. 

169.  A  present  participle  united  (i)  with  a  noun  to  form  a 
new  noun  with  a  meaning  different  from  that  which 
would  be  conveyed  by  the  two  words  taken  separately, 
(2)  with  a  preposition  used  absolutely  (i.  e.,  not  gov- 
erning a  following  noun),  to  form  a  noun,  should 
have  a  hyphen: 

boarding-house,  dining-haii,  sieeping-room,  dwelling-place, 
printing-office,  walking-stick,  starting-point,  stepping-stone, 
stumbling-block,  working-man;  the  putting-in  or  taking-out 
of  a  hyphen. 

170.  As  a  general  rule,  compounds  of  "book,"  "house," 
"mill,"  "room,"  "shop,'-  .nd  "work"  should  be 
printed  as  one  compact  word,  without  a  hyphen, 
when  the  prefixed  noun  contains  only  one  syllable, 
should  be  hyphenated  when  it  contains  two,  and 


62  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

should  be  printed  as  two  separate  words  when  it 

contains  three  or  more : 

handbook,   schoolbook,    notebook,    textbook;     pocket-book, 

story-book;  reference  book. 

boathouse,  clubhouse,  schoolhouse,  storehouse;  engine-house, 

power-house;  business  house. 

commill,  handmill,  sawmill,  windmill;  water-mill,  paper-mill; 

chocolate  mill. 

bedroom,   classroom,  schoolroom,  storeroom;    lecture-room; 

recitation  room. 

tinshop,   workshop;    bucket-shop,   tailor-shop;   policy  shop, 

blacksmith  shop. 

handwork,  woodwork;  metal- work;  filigree  work. 

Exceptions  are  rare  combinations,  and  such  as  for 

appearance'  sake  would  better  be  separated : 

source-book,  wheat-mill,  lunch-room,  head-work,  field-work. 

171.  Compounds  of  "maker,''  "dealer,"  and  other  words 

denoting  occupation  should  ordinarily  be  hyphenated ; 

likewise  nouns  denoting  different  occupations  of  the 

same  individual : 

harness-maker,  book-dealer,  job-printer  (see  168);  a  soldier- 
statesman,  the  poet-artist  Rossetti. 

Exceptions   are    a   few   short   words   of   everyday 

occurrence : 

bookmaker,  dressmaker. 

172.  Compounds  of  "store"  should  be  hyphenated  when 

the  prefix  contains  only  one  syllable;  otherwise  not: 

drug-store,   feed-store  (but:  bookstore);  grocery  store,   dry- 
goods  store. 


Manual  oj  Style:    Punctuation  63 

173.  Compounds  of  ''fellow"  are  always  hyphenated: 
fellow-man,  fellow-beings,  play-fellow. 

174.  Compounds    of    "father,"    "mother,"    "brother," 

"sister,"  "daughter,"  "parent,"  and  "foster"  should 

be  hyphenated: 

father-love  (but:  fatherland),  mother-tongue,  brother-officer, 
sister-nation,  foster-son,  daughter-cells,  parent-word. 

175.  Compounds  of  " great, "  indicating  the  fourth  degree 
in  a  direct  line  of  descent,  call  for  a  hyphen : 
great-grandfather,  great-grandson. 

176.  Compounds  of  "life"  and  "world"  require  a  hyphen: 

life-history,  life-principle  (but:  lifetime),  world-power,  world- 
problem. 

177.  Compounds  of  "skin"  with  words  of  one  syllable 
are  to  be  printed  as  one  word;  with  words  of  more 
than  one,  as  two  separate  words : 

calfskin,  sheepskin;  alligator  skin. 

178.  Compounds  of  "master"  should  be  hyphenated: 
master-builder,  master-stroke  (exception:  masterpiece). 

179.  Compounds  of  "god": 
sun-god,  rain-god. 

180.  "Half,"  "quarter,"  etc.,  combined  with  a  noun 
should  be  followed  by  a  hyphen : 

half-truth,  half-tone,  half-year,  half-title,  quarter-mile. 

181.  "Semi,"  "demi,"  "bi,"  "tri,"  etc.,  do  not  ordinarily 
demand  a  hyphen: 


64  The   University  o  j  Chicago  Press 

semiannual,  demigod,  demiurge,  biweekly,  bipartisan,  bichro- 
mate, bimetallist,  trimonthly,  tricolor,  trifoliate. 

Exceptions  are  long  or  unusual  formations : 
semi-centennial,  demi-relievo. 

182.  Compounds  of  "self"  are  hyphenated: 
self-evident,  self-respect. 

183.  Combinations  with  "fold"  are  to  be  printed  as  one 
word,  if  the  number  contains  only  one  syllable ;  if  it 
contains  more,  as  two : 

twofold,  tenfold;  fifteen  fold,  a  hundred  fold. 

184.  Adjectives  formed  by  the  suffixation  of  "like"  to 

a  noun  are  usually  printed  as  one  word  if  the  noun 

contains  only  one  syllable  (except  when  ending  in 

/);  if  it  contains  more  (or  is  a  proper  noun),  they 

should  be  hyphenated : 

childlike,    homelike,    warlike,    godlike;    eel-like,    bell-like; 
woman -like,  business-like;  American -like  (but:  Christlike). 

185.  "Vice,"  "ex-,"  "elect,"  "general,"  and  "lieutenant," 

constituting    parts   of   titles,  should   be    connected 

with  the  chief  noun  by  a  hyphen : 

Vice-Consul  Taylor,  ex-President  Cleveland,  the  governor- 
elect,  the  postmaster-general,  a  lieutenant-colonel. 

186.  Compounds  of  "by-"  should  be  hyphenated: 
by-product,  by-laws. 

187.  The  prefixes  "co-,"  "pre-,"  and  "re-,"  when  followed 
by  the  same  vowel  as  that  in  which  they  terminate, 


Manual  of  Style:    Punctuation  65 

take  a  hyphen ;  but,  as  a  rule,  they  do  not  when  fol- 
lowed by  a  different  vowel,  or  by  a  consonant : 

co-operation,  pre-empted,  re-enter;  but:  coequal,  coeduca- 
tion, prearranged,  reinstal;  cohabitation,  prehistoric,  recast 
(re-read). 

Note. — The  Botanical  Gazette  prints:   cooperate,  reenter,  etc. 

Exceptions  are  combinations  with  proper  names,  long 
or  unusual  formations,  and  words  in  which  the 
omission  of  the  hyphen  would  convey  a  meaning 
different  from  that  intended: 

Pre-Raphaelite,  re-Tammanize;  re-postpone,  re-pulverization ; 
re-formation  (as  distinguished  from  reformation),  re-cover 
(=cover  again),  re-creation. 

188.  The  negative  particles  "un-,"  "in-,"  and  '*a-"  do 
not  usually  require  a  hyphen : 

unmanly,  undemocratic,  inanimate,  indeterminate,  illimitable, 
impersonal,  asymmetrical. 

Exceptions  would  be  rare  and  artificial  combinations. 
The  particle  "non-,"  on  the  contrary,  ordinarily  calls 
for  a  hyphen,  except  in  the  commonest  words : 

non-aesthetic,  non -subservient,  non-contagious,  non-ability, 
non-interference,  non-unionist,  non -membership;  but:  nonage, 
nondescript,  nonessential,  nonplus,  nonsense,  noncombatant. 

189.  "  Quasi "  prefixed  to  a  noun  or  an  adjective  requires 
a  hyphen : 

quasi-corporation,  quasi-historical. 


66  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

190.  **Over"  and  "under"  prefixed  to  a  word  should  not 

be  followed  by  a  hyphen,  except  in  rare  cases  (lengthy 

words,  etc.) : 

overbold,  overemphasize,  overweight,  underfed,  underestimate, 
undersecretary;  but:  over-soul,  under-man,  over-spiritualistic. 

191.  The   Latin   prepositions   "ante,"    "anti,"    "inter," 

"intra,"  "post,"  "sub,"  and  "super"  prefixed  to  a 

word  do  not  ordinarily  require  a  hyphen : 

antedate,  antechamber,  antediluvian,  antidote,  antiseptic  (but: 
anti-imperialistic — cf.  187),  international,  interstate,  intramural 
(but:  intra-atomic),  postscript,  postgraduate,  subtitle,  subcon- 
scious, superfine. 

Exceptions  are  such  formations  as — 

ante-bellum,  ante-Nicene,  anti-Semitic,  inter-university,  post- 
revolutionary. 

192.  "Extra,"  "infra,"  "supra,"  and  "ultra"  as  a  rule 

call  for  a  hyphen: 

extra-hazardous,  infra-mundane,  supra-temporal,  ultra-con- 
servative (but:  Ultramontane). 

193.  In  fractional   numbers,  spelled  out,  connect  by  a 

hyphen  the  numerator  and  the  denominator,  unless 

either  already  contains  a  hyphen : 

"The  year  is  two-thirds  gone;"  four  and  five-sevenths; 
thirty -hundredths;  but:  thirty -one  hundredths. 

But  do  not  hyphenate  in  such  cases  as — 

"One  half  of  his  fortune  he  bequeathed  to  his  widow;  the 
other,  to  charitable  institutions." 


Manual  oj  Style:    Punctuation  67 

194.  In  the  case  of  two  or  more  compound  words  occurring 

together,  which  have  one  of  their  component  elements 

in  common,  this  element  is  frequently  omitted  from 

all  but  the  last  word,  and  its  implication  should  be 

indicated  by  a  hyphen: 

in  English-  and  German -speaking  countries;  one-,  five-,  and 
ten-cent  pieces;  "If  the  student  thinks  to  find  this  character 
where  many  a  literary  critic  is  searching — in  fifth-  and  tenth- 
century  Europe — he  must  not  look  outside  of  manuscript  tra- 
dition." 

Note. — Some  writers  regard  this  hyphen  as  an  objectionable 
Teutonism. 

195.  A  hyphen  is  used  to  indicate  a  prefix  or  a  suffix,  as  a 

particle  or  syllable,  not  complete  in  itself : 

**The  prefix  a-;"  "The  German  diminutive  suffixes  -chen 
and  -kin." 

196.  A  hyphen  is  employed  to  indicate  the  syllables  of  a 
word: 

di-a-gram,  pho-tog-ra-phy. 

197.  Following  is  a  list  of  forty  words  of  everyday  occur- 
rence which  should  be  hyphenated,  and  which  do 
not  fall  under  any  of  the  above  classifications : 

after-years  cross-section  man-of-war  subject-matter 

bas-relief  field-work  object-lesson  terra-cotta 

bee-line  folk-song  page-proof  thought-process 

bill-of-fare  food-stuff  pay-roll  title-page 

birth-rate  fountain-head  poor-law  trade-union 

blood-feud  good-will  post-office  view-point 

blood-relations  high-priest  price-Ust  wave-length 

common-sense  horse-power  sea-level  well-being 

cross-examine  ice-cream  sense-perception  well-nigh 

cross-reference  ill-health  son-in-law  will-power 


68  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


DIVISIONS 

198.  Avoid  all  unnecessary  divisions  of  words.  Wherever 
consistent  with  good  spacing,  carry  the  whole  word 
over  into  the  next  line. 

199.  Do  not,  in  wide  measures  (20  ems  or  more),  divide 
on  a  syllable  of  two  letters,  if  possible  to  avoid 
it.  Good  spacing,  however,  is  always  paramount. 
Words  of  four  letters — ^like  on-ly — should  never  be 
divided;  words  of  five  or  six — ^like  oc-cur,  oj-fice, 
let-teTj  rare-ly — rarely. 

200.  Never  let  more  than  two  consecutive  lines  termi- 
nate in  a  hyphen,  if  at  all  avoidable.  The  next  to 
the  last  line  in  a  paragraph  ought  not  to  end  in  a 
divided  word;  and  the  last  line  (the  ''breakline") 
should,  in  measures  of  15  ems  and  up,  contain  at 
least  four  letters.  Similarly,  avoid  a  broken  word 
at  the  bottom  of  a  right-hand  (recto)  page. 

201.  Do  not  divide  proper  nouns,  especially  names  of 
persons,  unless  absolutely  necessary. 

202.  Do  not  separate  (i.  e.,  put  in  different  lines)  the 
initials  of  a  name,  nor  such  combinations  as  A.  d., 
P.M.,  etc. 

203.  Avoid  the  separation  of  a  divisional  mark  (e.g.,  (a) 
or  (i),  in  the  middle  of  a  sentence,  from  the  section 
which  it  precedes. 


Manual  of  Style:    Divisions  69 

204.  Divide  according  to  pronunciation   (the  American 

system),  not  according  to  derivation   (the  English 

system) : 

democ-racy,  not:  demo-cracy;  knowl-edge,  not:  know-ledge; 
aurif-erous,  not:  auri-jerous;  antip-odes  (still  better:  antipo- 
des— see  207),  not:  anti-podes. 

205.  However,  divide  on  etymological  lines,  or  according 

to  derivation  and  meaning,  as  far  as  compatible  with 

pronunciation  and  good  spacing: 

dis-pleasure  is  better  than  displeas-ure;  school-master,  than 
schoolmas-ter. 

Shun  such  monstrosities  as — 
Passo-ver,  diso-bedience,  une-ven,  disa-bled. 

206.  Do  not  terminate  a  line  in  a  soft  c  or  g,  or  in  a  j. 
Escape  the  division  entirely,  if  possible;  if  not  pos- 
sible, divide: 

pro-cess,  not:'  proc-ess;  spa-cing,  not:  spac-ing  (the  rule  being 
that  in  present  participles  the  -ing  should  be  carried  over); 
pro-geny,  not:  prog-eny;  pre-judice,  not:  prej-udice. 

207.  Divide  on  a  vowel  wherever  practicable.     In  case  a 

vowel  alone  forms  a  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a  word, 

run  it  into  the  first  line ;  thus  print : 

sepa-rate,  not:  sep-arate;  particu-lar,  not:  partic-ular;  criti- 
cism, not:  crit-icism. 

Exceptions  are  words  in  -able  and  -ible,  which  should 
carry  the  vowel  over  into  the  next  line : 
read-able,  not:  reada-ble;  convert-ible,  not:  converti-ble. 


70  The  University  of  Chicago  Press 

208.  In  hyphenated  nouns  and  adjectives  avoid  additional 
hyphens : 

object-lesson,  not:  object-les-son;  fellow-being,  not:  jel-low- 
being;  poverty-stricken,  not:  pov-erty-stricken,  much  less: 
pover-ty-stricken. 

209.  A  coalition  of  two  vowel-sounds  into  one  (i.  e.,  a 
diphthong)  should  be  treated  as  one  letter.  There- 
fore do  not  divide,  if  there  is  any  escape : 

peo-ple  (either  syllable  makes  a  bad  division),  Cae-sar  (cf. 
201),  ail-ing. 

210.  In  derivatives  from  words  ending  in  /,  the  /,  in 
divisions,  should  be  carried  into  the  next  line  with 
the  suffix  if  the  accent  has  been  shifted ;  if  the  deriva- 
tive has  retained  the  accent  of  the  parent-word, 
the  t  should  be  be  left  in  the  first  line : 

objec-tive  (from  ob'ject);  deject-ive  (from  deject'). 

211.  The  addition  of  a  plural  s,  adding  a  new  syllable 
to  words  ending  in  an  5-sound,  does  not  create  a 
new  excuse  for  dividing  such  words : 

horses  and  circumstan-ces  are  impossible  divisions. 

212.  Adjectives  in  -ical  should  be  divided  on  the  i: 
phy si-cat,  not:  phys-ical  or  physic-al. 

213.  Do  not  divide  noth-ing. 


Manual  o}  Style:    Footnotes  71 


FOOTNOTES 

214.  For  reference  indices,  as  a  rule,  use  superior  figures. 
Only  in  special  cases  should  asterisks,  daggers,  etc., 
be  employed;  for  instance,  in  tabular  or  algebraic 
matter,  where  figures  would  be  likely  to  cause  con- 
fusion. Index  figures  in  the  text  should  be  placed 
after  the  punctuation  marks: 

....  the  niceties  of  style  which  were  then  invading  Attic 
prose,  ^  and  which  made  .... 

'  In  particular  the  avoidance  of  hiatus. 
P  =  y2-\-y3-* 

*  Schenk's  equation. 

When  figures  are  not  used,  the  sequence  of  indices 
should  be: 

♦("asterisk''  or  "star"),  t  ("dagger"),  t  ("double  dagger"), 
§  ("section  mark"),  ||  ("parallels"),  If  ("paragraph  mark"). 

215.  Where  references  to  the  same  work  follow  each  other 

closely   and   uninterruptedly,   use  ibid,   instead    of 

repeating  the  title.     This  ibid,  takes  the  place  of  as 

much   of   the   previous   reference   as    is    repeated. 

Ibid,  should,  however,  not  ordinarily  be  used  for  the 

first  footnote  on  a  verso  (left-hand)  page;  it  is  better 

usage  either  to  repeat  the  title,  if  short,  or  to  use 

loc.  cit.  or  op.  cit.: 

^  Spencer,  Principles  of  Sociology,  chap.  4. 

^  Ibid. 

3  Ibid.y  chap.  5. 

*  Spencer,  loc.  cit. 


72  The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 

2 1 6.  If  the  author's  name  is  given  in  the  text  in  connec- 
tion with  a  reference  to,  or  a  quotation  from,  his  work, 
it  should  not  be  repeated  in  the  footnote : 

....  This  theory  is  questioned  by  Herbert,  as  follows: 
*' I  cannot  admit  .  .  .  .  "^ 

*  Laws  of  the  Ancients,  I,  153. 

217.  It  is  better  to  place  the  index  figure  in  the  text  after 
the  quotation  than  before  it  (see  illustration  above). 

218.  Ordinarily,  omit  "Vol.,"  "chap.,"  and  "p."  in 
references  to  particular  passages.  Use  Roman  numer- 
als (capitals)  for  Volume,  Book,  Part,  and  Division ; 
Roman  numerals  (lower-case)  for  chapter  and  pages 
of  introductory,  matter  (Preface,  etc.) ;  and  Arabic 
numerals  for  number  (Heft)  and  text  pages.  Only 
when  confusion  would  be  liable  to  arise,  or  in  excep- 
tional cases,  use  "Vol.,"  etc.,  in  connection  with  the 
numerals : 

^  Miller,  The  French  Revolution  (2ded.;  London:  Abra- 
hams, 1888),  II,  Part  IV,  iii. 

'  S.  I.  Curtiss,  "The  Place  of  Sacrifice  among  Primitive 
Semites,"  Biblical  World,  XXI  (1903),  248  ff. 

3  "Structural  Details  in  Green  Mountain  Region,"  Bulletin 
iQS,  U.  S.  Geological  Survey. 

219.  The  date  of  publication  in  a  reference  to  a  periodical 
should  immediately  follow  the  volume  number,  and 
be  put  in  parentheses  (see  above  illustration). 

220.  In  work  set  on  the  linotype  machine  footnotes  should 
be  numbered  consecutively  through  an  article,  or  by 


Manual  oj  Style:    Footnotes  73 

chapters  in  a  book,  to  save  resetting  in  case  of 
change  (see  ** Hints  to  Authors  and  Editors,"  note 
under  *' Footnotes,"  p.  96). 

Note. — Exceptions  to  these  rules  are  footnotes  in  the  Botani- 
cal Gazette,  the  Astrophysical  Journal,  and  Classical  Philology 
and  the  Classical  Journal,  which  have  adopted  the  following 
styles : 

Botanical  Gazette — 

1  Livingston,  B.  E.,  (i)  On  the  nature  of  the  stimulus  which 
causes  the  change  in  form  of  polymorphic  green  algae.  Bot. 
Gaz.  30:289-317.   1900. 

,  (2)  Further  notes  on  the  physiology  of  polymorphism 

in  the  green  algae.     Bot.  Gaz.  32:292-302.  1901. 

2  Castle,  W.  E.,  The  heredity  of  sex.  Bull.  Mus.  Comp. 
Zool.  40:187-218.  1903. 

Astrophysical  Journal — 

I  "Revision  of  Wolf's  Sun-Spot  Relative  Numbers,"  Monthly 
Weather  Review,  30,  171,  1902. 

^Astrophysical  Journal,  10,  333,  1899. 

3  Wolf,  Astronomische  Mittheilungen,  No.  12,  1861. 

Classical  Philology  and  Classical  Journal — 

1  Gilbert  Greek  Constitutional  Antiquities,  p.  199. 

2  G.  L.  Hendrickson  "Origin  and  Meaning  of  the  Ancient 
Characters  of  Style,"  Am.  Jour.  Phil.  XXV  (1905),  pp.  250-75. 

3  Cicero  De  offlciis  i.  133-36,  140. 

Biblical  World,  Botanical  Gazette,  Elementary  School  Teacher, 
Journal  of  Political  Economy,  Journal  of  Semitic  Languages  and 
Literatures,  Journal  of  Sociology,  and  Journal  of  Theology  num- 
ber their  footnotes  consecutively  throughout  an  article;  Astro- 
physical  Journal,  Classical  Journal,  Classical  Philology,  Journal 
of  Geology,  Modern  Philology,  and  School  Review,  from  i  up  on 
each  page. 


74  The   U  mv  er  s  it  y  of  Chicago  Press 


TABULAR  WORK 

221.  In  ii-pt.  and  lo-pt.  matter  open  (unruled)  tables 
should  ordinarily  be  set  in  9-pt.  leaded;  ruled,  in 
8-pt.  solid.  In  9-pt.  matter  both  open  and  ruled 
tables  should  be  set  in  8-pt.  soHd.  In  8-pt.  matter 
open  tables  should  be  set  in  6-pt.  leaded;  ruled,  in 
6-pt.  solid.  In  6-pt.  matter  both  open  and  ruled 
tables  should  be  set  in  6-pt.  solid. 

222.  Captions  for  the  columns  of  open  tables  and  box- 
heads  for  ruled  tables  should  ordinarily  be  set  in 
6-pt.  In  ruled  tables  with  box-heads  of  several  stories, 
the  upper  story — ^primary  heads — should  be  set  in 
caps  and  small  caps ;  the  lower — secondary — in  caps 
and  lower-case.  Wherever  small  caps  are  used  in 
box-heads,  the  "stub"  (i.e.,  first  column)  head 
should,  as  a  rule,  also  be  set  in  caps  and  small  caps. 

223.  In  ruled  tables  there  should  be  at  least  two  leads' 
space  between  the  horizontal  rules  and  the  matter 
inclosed,  and,  if  practicable,  at  least  the  equivalent 
of  an  en-quad,  of  the  type  in  which  the  body  of 
the  table  is  set,  between  the  perpendicular  rules  and 
the  matter  inclosed. 

224.  In  open  tables  set  by  hand,  periods,  one  em  apart 
and  aligned,  should  be  used  between  the  columns; 
when   set   on   the   linotype   machine,   use   regular 


Manual  of  Style:     Tabular   Work  75 

leaders.  In  ruled  tables,  in  the  ''stub,"  leaders 
should  usually  be  employed,  if  there  is  room.  (A 
leader  is  a  piece  of  type,  having  dots  ["period 
leader"]  or  short  lines  [''hyphen  leader"]  upon 
its  face,  used  in  tables,  indexes,  etc.,  to  lead  the  eye 
across  a  space  to  the  right  word  or  number.) 

225.  In  columns  of  figures,  for  blanks  use  leaders  the 
width  of  the  largest  number  in  the  column ;  that  is, 
for  four  digits  use  a  2-em  leader,  etc.  (each  em 
containing  two  dots;  in  no  case,  however,  should  less 
than  two  dots  be  used).  Center  the  figures  in  the 
column;  if  they  cannot  be  put  in  the  exact  center, 
and  there  is  an  unequal  number  of  digits  in  the 
groups,  leave  more  space  on  the  right  than  on  the  left. 

226.  When  there  is  reading-matter  in  the  columns  of  a 
ruled  table,  it  should  be  centered,  if  possible ;  if  any 
line  runs  over,  use  hanging  indention,  and  align  all 
on  the  left. 

227.  All  tables,  and  the  individual  columns  in  tables, 
should  be  set  to  even  picas,  or  nonpareils,  if 
practicable. 

228.  Double  rules  should  be  used  at  the  top  of  all  tables, 
but  perpendicularly,  as  a  usual  thing,  only  when  a 
table  is  doubled  up  on  itself. 

229.  Tables  of  two  columns  only  should  be  set  as  open; 
of  three  or  more,  as  ruled. 


76 


The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


230.  ''Table  I,"  etc.,  in  headlines  of  tables  should  ordi- 
narily be  set  in  caps  of  the  type  in  which  the  body  of 
the  table  is  set;  the  following — descriptive — line,  if 
any,  in  caps  and  small  caps  of  the  same  type.  A 
single  (descriptive)  headhne,  not  preceded  by  the 
number  of  the  table,  may  be  set  in  straight  small 
caps  of  the  type  of  the  text  in  which  the  table  is 
inserted. 

231.  Specimen  tables  for  illustration: 

TABLE  I 

Series  of  Heads  of  Bands  in  the  Spectrum  of  Barium 

Fluoride 


Series 

A 

B 

C 

I 

20111.0 
20197.8 
19842 . 7 
19711.7 
19416.2 

19531-9 

-0.4302 

-0.441 

-0.4362 

-0-35765 
-0.3932 

-0.479 

9-034 
7.06 

13-522 
16.715 
10.618 

2 

■2 

0 

A 

C 

0 

6 

7.19 

TABLE  II — Continued 


Series  C 

Series  C 

m 

iVobs. 

iVcalc. 

m 

iVobs. 

N  calc. 

0 

I 

2 

3 

4 

5 

17094.8 
100.6 
106.4 
112. 2 
116. 5 
120.8 

17095.0 
100.8 
106.3 
III. 4 
116. 2 
120.6 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

17124.6 
128.3 

131-7 
134.6 

137-3 

17124-7 
128.4 

131-7 
134-7 
137-4 

Manual  o  j  Style:     Tabular   Work 


77 


TABLE  SHOWING   DISTRIBUTION   OF   EMPLOYEES 


States 


Illinois.  .  . 
Wisconsin 
Minnesota 
Michigan. 
Indiana  .. 

Total 


No.  OF 

Number  of  Employees 

Facto- 
ries 

Men 

Women 

Boys 

Girls 

527 

12,306 

809 

115 

^3 

117 

4,075 

618 

79 

5 

245 

6,714 

2>^>^ 

35 

•  • 

203 

5.923 

414 

. .  . 

•  • 

370 

8,451 

511 

26 

6 

1,462 

37,469 

2,690 

155 

34 

Total 

13,253 

4,777 
7,087 

6,337 
8,994 

40,448 


Settings 


Wedge 

0 

5 

10 

15 

cm. 

cm. 

cm. 

cm. 

M3I 

145-5 

158.3 

187. 1 

142.4 

144 

3 

160.9 

186.9 

143 -o 

143 

8 

159  6 

184.8 

142.2 

144 

9 

1593 

186.2 

144.2 

142.68 

144 

54 

159- 52 

186.25 

Diaph.  I  over  s,. 
Diaph.    0.29    cm.    over 

wedge. 
Reading  of  pointer,  with 

meter  -  stick   touching 

s,   and  screen   163.66 

cm. 


TECHNICAL  TERMS 


EXPLANATION  OF  TECHNICAL  TERMS 

The  Point  System — 

232.  The  point  is  the  underlying  unit  of  all  typographical 
measures. 

233.  The  standard  of  measurement  is  the  pica.  A  pica 
is  twelve  points  (one-sixth  of  an  inch). 

This  line  is  set  in  12-pt.  {pica). 
This  line  is  set  in  11 -pt.  {small  pica). 
This  line  is  set  in  lo-pt.  (long  primer). 
This  line  is  set  in  9-pt.  {bourgeois). 
This  line  is  set  in  8-pt.  {brevier). 
This  line  is  set  in  7-pt.  {minion). 

This  line  is  set  in  6-pt.  {nonpareil). 
This  line  is  set  in  s-pt.  (pearl) , 

The  sizes  larger  or  smaller  than  these  are  seldom 
used  in  book  composition. 

Styles  of  Type — 

234.  Ordinary  type  is  called  roman.    To  "roman-quote" 
is  to  put  in  roman  type  between  quotation  marks. 
This  line  is  set  in  roman. 

235.  Type  with  a  sloping  face  is  called  italic  or  italics. 
ItaHc  is  indicated  in  manuscripts  by  a  straight  line 
under  the  word  or  words  (see  p.  106). 

This  line  is  set  in  italics. 

81 


82  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

236.  Type  with  a  heavy  black  face  is  called  hold-face. 
Bold-face  is  indicated  by  a  wave-line  (see  p.  106). 
This  line  is  set  in  bold-face. 

237.  The  body  of  a  type  is  called  the  shank;  the  upper 
surface,  bearing  the  character,  the  face;  the  part 
of  the  face  projecting  beyond  the  shank,  the  kern; 
the  part  of  the  shank  projecting  beyond  the  face, 
the  shoulder. 

238.  A  fonlj  or  complete  assortment  of  a  given  size,  of 
type  includes  large  capitals  {^'caps^^)y  small  capitals 
(^' small  caps^')f  and  lower- case  letters  (so  called  from 
being  placed  in  the  lower  half  of  the  printer's  case). 
Caps  are  indicated  by  three  straight  lines;  small 
caps,  by  two  (see  p.  106). 

THESE  ARE  CAPS  OF  g-PT.  ROMAN. 

THESE   ARE   SMALL  CAPS   OF   Q-PT.   ROMAN. 

These  are  lower-case  of  9-pt.  roman. 

Spacing — 

239.  An  em,  em-quad,  or  simply  quad  (= quadrat)  is  a 
block  of  type  the  top  of  which  forms  a  perfect 
square.  A  12-pt.  quad  is  thus  a  piece  of  metal 
one-sixth  of  an  inch  square  at  the  ends.  The  term 
em  is  also  used  of  the  size  of  such  a  square  in  any 
given  size  of  type  as  a  unit  of  measurement. 
^*  Indent  8-pt.  2  ems  "  thus  means  that  the  line  should 
be  indented  16  points.  An  em-dash  is  a  dash  the 
width  of  an  em. 


Manual  of  Style:     Technical   Terms  83 

240.  Two-  and  three-em  quads  are  multiples  of  the  above, 
cast  in  one  block  of  type-metal.  Two-  and  three-em 
dashes  are  dashes  the  width  of  2-  and  3-em  quads, 
respectively. 

241.  An  en-quad  is  half  the  size  of  an  em-quad  in  width. 
Thus  an  8-pt.  en-quad  is  4  points  wide  (thick)  and 
8  points  long  (deep).  An  en-dash  is  a  dash  the 
width  of  an  en-quad. 

242.  A  three-em  space  is  one-third  of  an  em  in  thickness. 
This  is  also  called  a  thick  space,  and  is  the  standard 
space  used  to  separate  words. 

243.  A  jour-em  space  is  one-fourth  of  an  em;  a  jive-em 
space  is  one-fifth  of  an  em.  Four-  and  5-em  spaces 
are  also  called  thin  spaces. 

244.  A  hair- space  is  any  space  thinner  than  a  5-em. 

This    line    is    spaced    with    em-quads. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  en -quads. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  3-em  spaces. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  4-em  spaces. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  5-em  spaces. 

The  letters  in  this  word  are  hair-spaced:   America. 

This  is  a  3-em  dash:  

This  is  a  2 -em  dash:  

This  is  an  em-dash:  —  '  ■ 

This  is  an  en-dash:  - 

245.  Space  evenly.  A  standard  line  should  have  a  3-em 
space  between  all  words  not  separated  by  other 
punctuation  points  than  commas,  and  after  commas; 


84  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

an  en- quad  after  semicolons,  and  colons  followed  by 
a  lower-case  letter;  two  3 -em  spaces  after  colons 
followed  by  a  capital;  an  em-quad  after  periods, 
and  exclamation  and  interrogation  points,  conclud- 
ing a  sentence.  If  necessary  to  reduce,  begin  with 
commas,  and  letters  of  slanting  form — i.  e.,  with  a 
large  "shoulder  "  on  the  side  adjoining  the  space;  if 
necessary  to  increase,  begin  with  overlapping  let- 
ters— i.e.,  with  ''kerns"  protruding  on  the  side 
adjoining  the  space — straight-up-and-down  letters, 
and  points  other  than  periods  and  commas  (in  this 
order).  In  a  well-spaced  line,  with  a  3-em  space 
between  a  majority  of  the  words,  there  should  not 
be  more  than  an  en-quad  between  the  rest;  this 
proportion  should  be  maintained  in  increasing  or 
reducing.  To  justify  a  line  is  to  adjust  it,  making 
it  even  or  true,  by  proper  spacing. 

246.  Do  not  follow  an  exceptionally  thin-spaced  line  with 
an  exceptionally  wide-spaced  one,  or  vice  versa,  if 
at  all  avoidable. 

247.  Never  hair- space,  or  em-quad,  a  line  to  avoid  a 
run-over. 

248.  Do  not  space  out  the  last  line  of  a  paragraph 
allowing  of  an  em's  or  more  indention  at  the  end. 

249.  Short  words,  like  ''a,"  ''an,"  etc.,  should  have  the 
same  space  on  each  side. 


Manual  of  Style:     Technical   Terms  85 

250.  Use  a  thin  space  after  §,  ^,  and  similar  signs;  before 
"f.,"  *'ff.,"  and  the  metric  symbols;  and  between 
"A.M.;'  "p.m.,"  "A.D.,"  "B.C.,"  "i.e.,"  ''e.g.": 

"§  14.    Be  it  further  ordained  ....;"  pp.  10 ff.;   16  cm.; 
1906  A.  D. 

251.  In  American  and  English  sums  of  money  no  space 
is  used  between  $  and  £  (pounds),  a  hair-space 
between  s.  (shillings)  and  d,  (pence),  and  the 
numerals : 

$2.75;  £10  ss.  2d. 

252.  After  Arabic  numerals  at  the  beginning  of  lines, 
denoting  subsections,  there  should  be  an  en- quad; 
after  Roman  numerals,  two  3-em  spaces.  After 
Roman  numerals  in  cap,  cap-and-small-cap,  or 
small-cap  center-heads  there  should  be  an  em-quad. 
Small-cap  headings  should  have  an  en-quad,  cap- 
and-small-cap  and  cap  headings,  two  3-em  spaces, 
between  the  words. 

253 .  Scripture  passages  should  be  spaced  thus : 
II  Cor.  1:16-20;  2:5 — 3:12. 

254.  In  formulae,  and  elsewhere,  put  a  thin  space  on 
each  side  of  mathematical  signs.  Between  letters 
forming  products,  and  before  superior  figures 
indicating  powers,  ordinarily  no  space  should  be 
used: 


86  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

Indentation  (Printer's  Term:  Indention) — 

255.  In  measures  of  less  than  10  picas'  width,  indent  all 
sizes  I  em.  In  measures  of  from  10  to  20,  indent 
ii-pt.  I  em;  lo-pt.,  ij;  9-pt.,  ij;  8-pt.,  i|;  6-pt.,  2. 
In  measures  of  from  20  to  30,  indent  ii-pt.  ij  ems; 
lo-pt.,  I  J;  9-pt.,  if;  8-pt.,  2;  6-pt.,  2  J.  This  is 
for  plain  paragraphs.  In  hanging  indentions,  in 
measures  of  less  than  10  picas,  indent  all  sizes 
I  em;  from  10  to  20,  ii-pt.,  lo-pt.,  9-pt.,  and  8-pt., 
ij  ems;  6-pt.,  2  ems;  from  20  to  30,  ii-pt.,  lo-pt., 
9-pt.,  and  8-pt.,  2  ems;  6-pt.,  3  ems. 

256.  In  poetry,  center  the  longest  line  and  let  the  inden- 
tion be  governed  by  that;  unless  the  longest  line 
is  of  disproportionate  length,  in  which  case  an 
average  of  the  long  lines  should  be  struck,  the  idea 
being  to  give  the  whole  a  centered  appearance. 
Where  quotations  from  different  poems,  following 
each  other  in  close  succession,  vary  but  slightly  in 
length  of  verse  lines,  it  is  better  to  indent  all  alike. 

Indent  according  to  rhymes  and  length  of  lines. 
In  blank  verse,  where  the  lines  are  approximately  of 
the  same  length,  they  should  be  aligned.  If  con- 
secutive lines  rhyme,  they  should  likewise,  as  a  rule, 
be  aligned.  If  the  rhymes  alternate,  or  follow  at 
certain  intervals,  indent  the  rhyming  lines  alike ;  that 
is,  if,  e.  g.,  lines  i  and  3,  and  2  and  4,  rhyme,  set  the 
former  flush  in  the  measure  previously  determined 


Manual  of  Style:     Technical   Terms  87 

by  the  longest  line,  and  indent  the  latter  (usually  one 
em) ;  follow  this  scheme  in  any  similar  arrangement. 
If  any  line  is  disproportionately  short — that  is,  con- 
tains a  smaller  number  of  feet — indent  it  more : 

And  blessed  are  the  homy  hands  of  toil ! 
The  busy  worid  shoves  angrily  aside 
The  man  who  stands  with  arms  akimbo  set, 
Until  occasion  tells  him  what  to  do. 

I  laugh  at  the  lore  and  the  pride  of  man, 
At  the  sophist  schools  and  the  learned  clan ; 
For  what  are  they  all,  in  their  high  conceit, 
When  man  in  the  bush  with  God  may  meet  ? 

So  nigh  is  grandeur  to  our  dust. 

So  near  is  God  to  man. 
When  Duty  whispers  low,  "Thou  must," 

The  youth  replies,  "I  can." 

Not  lightly  fall 

Beyond  recall 
The  written  scrolls  a  breath  can  float; 

The  crowning  fact. 

The  kingliest  act 
Of  Freedom  is  the  freeman's  vote ! 

257.  In  ordinary  reading-matter  ''plain  paragraphs" 
are  always  preferable.  Where  it  is  desired  to  bring 
into  relief  the  opening  word  or  words  of  a  paragraph, 
or  the  number  introducing  such  paragraph,  or  where 
a  center- head  makes  more  than  two  lines,  "hanging 
indention"  is  often  employed  (see  265). 


88  The  University  of  Chicago  Press 

Leads — 

258.  A  lead  is  a  strip  of  metal  used  to  separate  lines  of 
type.    The  ordinary   (standard)  lead  is  2  points 

. .  thick.     Matter   with    leads    between    the   lines   is 

called  leaded;  without,  solid. 

This  book  throughout  is  set  leaded.  Only  this  paragraph, 
for  illustration,  and  the  Index,  are  set  solid.  Nearly  all  books 
are  leaded. 

259.  A  slug  is  a  strip  of  metal,  thicker  than  a  lead,  used 
in  the  make-up  of  printed  matter  into  pages,  to  be 
inserted  after  headlines,  etc.  The  two  standard 
sizes  are  6  and  12  points  thick,  respectively  (a 
nonpareil  and  a  pica). 

Heads  or  Headings — 

260.  A  center-head  is  a  headline  placed  at  equal  distances 
from  both  margins  of  the  page  or  column.  Center- 
heads  are  usually  set  in  caps  or  small  caps.  This 
is  a  center-head: 

SEC.  VIT.     THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  SOCIOLOGY 

When  such  center-head  makes  more  than  two 
lines,  either  the  (inverted)  ''pyramid"  form  or 
"hanging  indention"  is  employed: 

ART  EDUCATION  FOR  THE  AMERICAN  PEOPLE,  AS   SHOWN  AT 
THE     LOUISIANA     PURCHASE    EXPOSITION     IN     THE 
NORMAL   SCHOOLS,   ART  SCHOOLS,  AND 
ART  HANDICRAFT 

ART  EDUCATION  FOR  THE  AMERICAN  PEOPLE,  AS  SHOWN  AT 
THE  LOUISIANA  PURCHASE  EXPOSITION  IN  THE  NORMAL 
SCHOOLS,  ART  SCHOOLS,  AND  ART  HANDICRAFT 


Manual  of  Style:    Technical   Ter^ns  89 

261.  A  side-head  is  a  headline  placed  at  the  side  of  the 
page  or  column.  It  may  either  be  set  in  a  separate 
line,  in  which  case  it  is  usually  set  flush — that  is,  in 
alignment  with  the  margin  of  the  type-page;  or 
run  in — that  is,  run  together  in  a  continuous  line 
with  the  paragraph  to  which  it  belongs.  The  latter 
is  the  more  common  form.  Side-heads  are  most 
frequently  set  in  italics ;  sometimes  in  caps  and  small 
caps  or  in  bold-face  (see  156) : 

Side-head — 

A  side -head  is  a  headline  .... 

Side-head. — A  side-head  is  ...  . 

Side-head. — A  side -head  is  ...  . 

Side-head — 

A  side -head  is  ...  . 

262.  A  cut-in  head  is  a  head  placed  in  a  box  cut  into 

the  side  of  the  type-page,  usually  set  in  different 

type,  and  as  a  rule  placed  under  the  first  two  lines 

of  the  text : 

In  making  inquiry,  therefore,  into  the  value  of  fraternity 

life  among  the  children,  it  is  necessary  to  test  it  entirely  in 

accordance  with  its  power  to  contribute  to  the 

rJfl'^L^^        welfare  of  the  school  as  a  social   whole.     The 
Influence 

school,  being  a  social  organization,  has  a  right 
to  demand  that  every  individual  contribute  the  best  that  is 
in  him  to  the  good  of  all.    In  making  this  contribution,  it 

263.  A  hox-head  is  a  head  for  a  column  in  a  ruled 
table  (see  231). 


90  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

264.  A  running-head  is  a  headline  placed  at  the  top  of 
each  page  of  a  book,  etc.,  usually  giving  the  main 
title  of  the  work  on  the  left-hand  (verso)  page,  and 
the  title  of  the  chapter,  or  other  subdivision,  on 
the  right-hand  (recto)  page.  A  good  v^orking  rule 
for  running-heads  is  to  set  them  in — roman  or  italic — 
capitals  two  sizes  (points)  smaller  than  the  type 
of  the  text. 

Paragraphs — 

265.  Two  kinds  of  paragraphs  are  distinguished — plain 
and  hanging.  A  plain  (or  regular)  paragraph  has 
the  first  line  indented,  and  the  others  set  flush.  A 
hanging  paragraph  (^^ hanging  indention^^)  has  the 
first  line  set  flush,  and  the  others  indented: 

Human  Nature  and  the  Social  Order.    By  Charles  Horton 
CooLEY.    New  York:    Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  1902- 
Pp.  viii-}-404. 
In  terms  of  his  own  thesis  Dr.  Cooley  has  transformed 

the  social  materials  of  his  times  into  a  personal  product; 

his  mind  has  reorganized  and  reproduced  the  suggested 

Proofs — 

266.  A  galley-proof  is  an  impression  of  the  type  contained 
in  a  long,  shallow  receptacle  of  metal,  known  as  a 
galley,  into  which  the  compositor  empties  the  mate- 
rial as  he  sets  it  line  by  line  from  the  manuscript. 

267.  A  page-proof  is  an  impression  of  the  type  material 
made  up  into  page- form. 


Manual  of  Style:     Technical   Terms  91 

268.  A  plate- proof  or  foundry- pr 00 j  is  a  proof  taken  of  the 
type-page  immediately  before  an  electrotype  cast  is 
made  of  it.  This  proof  has  a  black  border  around 
the  pages,  made  by  ink  from  the  metal  frame  used 
to  hold  the  type  in  place  while  the  cast  is  being 
made.  Most  publications  nowadays  are  printed  from 
such  plates,  and  not  directly  from  the  type. 

269.  A  foul  proof  is  a  galley-proof  containing  author's 
corrections. 

270.  A  revise  is  a  new  proof  of  type  corrected  from  a 
marked  proof. 

Make-up^ 

271.  The  arranging  into  page-fonn  of  type-lines  is  called 
•  the  make-up. 

272.  A  folio  is  a  page-number.  Even  numbers  are  placed 
on  the  verso;  odd,  on  the  recto.  A  drop-folio  is  a 
page-number  placed  at  the  bottom  of  a  page. 

273.  A  half-title^  or  bastard  title,  is  the  abbreviated  title  of 
a  book  placed  on  a  separate  page  preceding  the  full 
title-page,  or  the  title  of  a  part,  chapter,  etc.,  preced- 
ing such  part  or  chapter  on  a  separate  page  in  the 
body  of  the  book. 

Typesetting  Machines — 

274.  The  linotype — named  Mergenthaler  after  its  inven- 
tor— is  a  composing-machine  on  which,  by  touching 


92 


The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


a  keyboard,  the  matrices  from  which  the  characters 
are  cast  arrange  themselves  automatically  in  lines 
in  a  receptacle,  which  then  is  brought  in  contact, 
on  the  same  machine,  with  molten  type-metal, 
through  a  mechanical  device  which  liberates  and 
arranges  in  order  on  a  galley  the  stereotyped  strips, 
each  consisting  of  a  line  of  type. 

275.  The  monotype — named  Lanston  after  the  patentee — 
is  a  composing-machine  on  which,  by  touching  a  key- 
board, perforations  are  made  in  strips  of  paper,  which 
then  are  transferred  to  a  second  machine,  where  the 
matrices  to  which  the  perforations  correspond  are 
brought  in  contact  with  molten  type-metal,  each 
character  being  cast  separately  and  arranged  auto- 
matically on  a  galley  in  justified  Hnes. 


APPENDIX 


HINTS  TO  AUTHORS  AND  EDITORS 

Preparation  of  Manuscripts — 

Manuscripts  should  be  either  typewritten  or  in  a 
perfectly  clear  handwriting.     The  former  is  preferable. 

The  sheets  should  be  of  uniform  size;  q^Xii"  is  a 
desirable  size. 

Only  one  side  of  the  paper  should  be  used. 

Never  roll  manuscripts;  place  them  flatly  in  a  box 
or  an  envelope. 

The  sheets  should  not  be  fastened  together  except  by 
pins  or  clips,  which  can  be  easily  removed. 

When  one  piece  of  a  page  is  to  be  fastened  to  another, 
use  mucilage,  not  pins.  Pins  are  liable  to  become  un- 
fastened, and  the  slips  lost  or  misplaced. 

Liberal  margins  should  be  left  at  the  top  and  left- 
hand  side  of  the  sheets.  This  space  will  be  needed  by 
the  reader  or  printer  for  directions. 

The  pages  should  be  numbered  consecutively.  In- 
serted and  omitted  pages  should  be  clearly  indicated. 
Thus,  sheets  to  be  inserted  after  p.  4  should  be  marked 
"4A,"  "4B,"  etc.;  sheets  omitted  between  p.  4  and  p.  8 
should  be  indicated  by  numbering  p.  4,  "4-7." 

Additions  to  original  pages  should  be  placed  after  the 
sheets  to  which  they  belong,  and  should  be  marked 
"Insert  A,"  "Insert  B,"  etc.     The  places  where  they  are 

95 


g6  The   University  o  j  Chicago  Press 

to  be  inserted   should  be   indicated  by   writing   "Here 
insert  A,"  etc.,  on  the  margin  of  the  original  pages. 

Paragraphs — 

Paragraphs  should  be  plainly  indicated,  either  by 
indenting  the  first  line  or  by  a  ^  mark. 

Footnotes — 

Footnotes  should  be  clearly  designated,  either  by 
separating  them  from  the  text  by  running  a  line  across 
the  page,  or  by  using  ink  of  different  color.  Some  writers 
make  a  perpendicular  fold  in  the  paper,  using  two-thirds 
of  the  space  for  the  text  and  one-third  for  the  notes. 

The  word  in  the  text  carrying  the  note  should  be 
followed  by  a  superior  figure  corresponding  to  that  pre- 
ceding the  note. 

Footnotes  should  never  be  run  into  the  text  in  manu- 
scripts, whether  in  parentheses  or  otherwise. 

Note. — It  is  important  to  remember  that  in  matter  set  on  the 
linotype  machine  the  slightest  change  necessitates  the  resetting  of 
the  whole  line.  Since  it  is  impossible  to  foresee  how  the  notes  will 
happen  to  come  out  in  the  make-up,  it  is  impracticable  to  number 
them  from  i  up  on  each  page.  The  best  way  is  to  number  them 
consecutively  throughout  an  article,  or  by  chapters  in  a  book;  bearing 
in  mind,  however,  the  very  essential  point  that  the  change,  by  omission 
or  addition,  of  one  single  number  involves  the  resetting  of  the  whole 
first  line  of  each  succeeding  note  to  the  end  of  the  series. 

This  difficulty  is  not  met  with  in  matter  set  on  the  monotype 
machine  or  by  hand,  where  the  change  of  a  number  amounts  simply 
to  substituting  one  figure  for  another. 


Manual  oj  Style:    Appendix  97 

Proper  Names,  etc. — 

Proper  names,  foreign  words,  and  figures  should,  in 
handwritten  manuscript,  be  written  with  the  utmost  care 
and  distinctness. 

Title- Pages,  etc. — 

Copy  for  title-pages,  prefaces,  tables  of  contents,  etc., 
should  be  submitted  with  the  manuscript.  Copy  for 
indices  should  be  compiled  from  the  special  set  of  page- 
proofs  furnished  for  this  purpose,  and  promptly  delivered 
to  the  printers.  Unnecessary  delay  is  often  caused  by 
postponing  these  details  till  the  last  minute. 

Reading  of  Proofs— 

Read  and  return  your  proofs  promptly. 

In  marking  proof-sheets,  use  the  standard  proofreaders' 
marks  (see  p.  106).  Do  not  adopt  a  system  of  your 
own,  which,  however  plain  it  may  seem  to  you,  is  liable 
to  appear  less  so  to  the  compositor. 

Be  careful  to  answer  all  queries  in  the  proofs.  Delays 
and  errors  often  result  from  not  attending  to  them. 

Remember  that  changes  in  the  type  cost  money.  The 
omission  or  addition  of  a  word  in  the  middle  of  a  para- 
graph may  necessitate  resetting  the  whole  of  this  from 
that  point  on;  and  if  such  alteration  is  made  in  the  page- 
proof,  it  may  further  involve  repaging  the  entire  article 
or  chapter.  Make  your  manuscript  as  perfect  as  possible 
before  delivering  it  to  the  printer.  Any  necessary  altera- 
tions should  be  made  in  the  galley-proof,  as  each  succeed- 


98  The   University  o  j  Chicago  Press 

ing  stage  will  add  to  the  cost.  Corrections  in  plates  should 
be  studiously  avoided.  Not  only  are  they  expensive,  but 
they  are  apt  to  injure  the  plates. 

The  original  manuscript  should  in  each  instance  be 
returned  with  the  galley-proof,  in  order  that  the  proof- 
reader may  refer  to  it,  should  any  question  arise;  and 
each  successive  set  of  proofs  returned  should  be  accom- 
panied by  the  previous  marked  set.  This  will  assist  in 
calculating  the  cost  of  alterations  properly  chargeable  to 
you. 


Manual  of  Style:    Appendix  99 


HINTS  TO  PROOFREADERS 

Read  everything  as  if  you  yourself  were  the  author, 
and  your  reputation  and  fortune  depended  upon  its  ac- 
curacy. 

Be  particularly  careful  about  proper  names  and  figures. 
If  the  copy  is  not  perfectly  clear,  or  if  you  have  reason  to 
doubt  its  correctness,  look  it  up,  or  query  it  to  the  author. 

In  asking  questions  of  authors  or  editors,  make  your 
point  clear.  A  simple  query  is  often  not  enough  to  draw 
attention  to  the  particular  point  you  have  in  mind. 
Queries  in  the  manuscript  should  be  transferred  to  the 
proof,  or  attention  should  be  directed  in  the  manuscript  to 
the  proof. 

Be  discreet  about  your  queries.  Don't  stultify  your- 
self and  discredit  the  office  by  asking  foolish  questions 
on  the  proof.  The  author  will  be  thankful  for  any  sensible 
suggestion  you  may  make,  but  will  resent  trivial  criticisms. 
About  many  matters  in  this  world,  grammar  and  logic 
included,  there  is  abundant  room  for  differences  of 
opinion.  Grant  writers  the  privilege  of  preferring  theirs 
to  yours. 

Make  a  study  of  the  "personal  equation"  in  the  case 
of  those  individuals  (editors  and  others)  with  whom  you 
as  a  proofreader  will  constantly  have  to  deal.  One  person 
may  expect  of  you  as  a  matter  of  course  what  another 
might  regard  as  an  unwarranted  interference. 


loo  The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 

Never  hesitate  to  correct  anything  that  is  palpably 
wrong,  however  positively  the  copy  may  assert  the  con- 
trary. Remember  that  the  blame  for  the  error  will 
eventually  be  laid  at  your  door — and  justly. 

Do  not  follow  copy  blindly,  unreasoningly.  Proof- 
reading machines  are  yet  to  be  invented.  Follow  copy 
only  when,  and  as  far  as,  it  is  correct.  Whether  or  not  it  is 
correct,  you  are  the  judge. 

Do  not  excuse  yourself  by  saying,  '*I  thought  the  copy 
was  edited;"  or,  '*I  thought  the  author  knew  what  he 
wanted."  Editors  are  fallible,  and  should  be  made  to 
live  up  to  their  own  rules.  And  as  for  authors,  typo- 
graphically they  very  often  do  not  know  what  they  want 
until  they  see  it  in  type — and  not  always  then. 

Do  not  ask  authors  or  editors  to  decide  questions  of 
style.  The  Manual  oj  Style  is  primarily  meant  for  you. 
Learn  its  rules  by  heart,  so  that  you  may  correct  any 
violation  of  them  you  may  come  upon,  without  asking 
questions.  Stand  on  your  own  feet.  In  case  the  copy 
is  not  prepared,  you  ought  to  be  capable  of  doing  the 
preparing  yourself. 

Do  not  fall  into  the  fallacy  that  the  author's  or  editor's 
O.  K.  relieves  you  of  all  or  any  part  of  your  responsibility. 
Authors  and  editors  depend  on  the  proofreader  to  see  to 
it  that  the  typographical  requirements  have  been  met, 
and  that  the  adopted  style  has  been  adhered  to,  and 
affix  their  signatures  only  on  that  supposition. 

Do  not  shield  yourself  behind  your  copyholder.    The 


Manual  o  j  Style:    Appendix  loi 

copyholder  is  there  to  assist  you,  not  to  tell  you  how  to 
do  things.  If  you  think  you  have  cause  to  suspect  her 
version  of  a  matter,  investigate  for  yourself. 

Do  not  read  to  your  copyholder.  She  is  supposed  to 
read  to  you.  A  copyholder  may  or  may  not  be  experi- 
enced and  trustworthy  enough  to  control  the  situation; 
but  that  is  not  what  she  is  paid  for.  Besides,  your  mind 
will  be  freer  to  attend  to  your  own  part  of  the  work,  if 
you  attempt  to  do  only  one  thing  at  a  time. 

Do  not  suggest  from  your  proof  a  word  or  phrase  which 
the  copyholder  has  difficulty  in  making  out  from  the 
manuscript.  Let  her  work  out  her  own  salvation.  If 
she  cannot,  remember  that  you  are  the  arbiter,  and  not  the 
compositor. 

Let  your  copyholder  do  your  revising,  except  in  diffi- 
cult cases.  She  likes  to,  and  can  do  it.  Your  own  time 
is  too  valuable — or  ought  to  be. 

If  memoranda  or  verbal  instructions  are  given  you 
bearing  upon  any  particular  piece  of  work  you  may  have 
in  hand,  you  will  be  expected  to  see  to  it  that  such  direc- 
tions are  adhered  to  without  any  further  reminder. 

If  work,  for  whatever  reason,  is  accumulating  upon 
your  table  faster  than  you  can  attend  to  it,  or  if  you  find 
that  you  cannot  single-handed  get  out  a  piece  of  work  at 
the  time  promised,  notify  the  one  in  charge — and  notify 
him  in  time. 

Do  not  permit  yourself  to  be  stampeded.  Cultivate 
speed,  but  remember  that  accuracy  is  even  more  impor- 


I02  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

tant.  Do  things  right.  If  the  necessary  time  is  not  given 
you,  take  it — within  reasonable  limits.  The  credit  accru- 
ing to  you  from  detecting  an  important  error  at  the  last 
moment  is  likely  to  outlast  the  displeasure  at  your  lack 
of  dispatch. 

In  unavoidable  cases  of  "rush,"  where  conditions  and 
orders  are  imperative,  protect  yourself  by  letting  it  be 
understood  that  you  have  done  your  best  in  the  time  allot- 
ted you,  but  must  disclaim  any  further  responsibility. 

Whoever  has  the  final  revision  for  press  of  a  journal  or 
a  book  should  see  to  it  that  everything  is  complete,  and  that 
all  the  preliminary  matter — title,  copyright,  contents,  etc. 
— is  there. 

Contents  of  journals  should  be  made  up  at  the  time 
the  first  page-proofs  are  read. 

Put  your  initial  at  the  top  of  every  galley  you  read 
or  revise.  This  will  save  time  in  tracing  proofs,  and  insure 
the  giving  of  credit  where  it  belongs. 


Manual  of  Style:    Appendix  103 


HINTS  TO  COPYHOLDERS 

Cultivate  a  low,  soft,  clear  reading-voice.  Do  not 
imagine  that  it  is  necessary  for  everyone  in  the  room  to 
hear  you. 

Remember  that,  from  the  proofreader's  point  of  view, 
the  small  words  are  as  essential  as  the  big  ones.  Get 
them  all  in — and  get  them  in  right. 

Enunciate  your  plural  5's  distinctly. 

Do  not  get  offended  when  your  reader  asks  you  to 
repeat,  or  to  look  at  the  copy  for  himself.  He  intends  no 
aspersion  on  your  personal  integrity. 

Regulate  and  equalize  your  speed.  Do  not  race  at  a 
break-neck  pace  through  typewritten  copy,  while  you 
thread  your  path  fumblingly  through  the  mazes  of  manu- 
script. 

Do  not  keep  guessing  at  a  word.  Look  at  it  closely, 
consider  the  context,  and  do  not  speak  it  until  you  have 
made  it  out — or  at  least  made  the  very  best  guess  of 
which  you  are  capable. 

Sit  at  right  angles  to  your  reader,  if  possible.  He 
hears  you  better,  and  you  can  watch  his  hand  better,  if 
you  do. 

Give  your  reader  a  chance  to  make  his  corrections. 
Slow  up  the  moment  he  puts  his  pencil  to  the  paper. 
This  will  save  you  going  over  the  same  ground  twice. 

Evolve    your   own    system    of    signals.     Do    not,    for 


I04  T  h\e   Uln  iversity  of  Chicago  Press 

instance,  waste  time  by  saying  ''in  italics"  for  every 
word  or  letter  so  treated.  Instead,  raise  your  voice,  or 
tap  the  table  with  your  pencil  once  for  each  word,  or  both. 
Such  a  code  need  not  be  intelligible  to  others  than  your- 
self and  your  reader. 

Do  not  waste  time  over  matters  of  style.  The  proof- 
reader is  supposed  to  know  the  rules  without  your  telling 
him;  for  instance,  what  titles  are  to  be  set  in  italics,  and 
what  roman-quoted. 

Be  careful  in  transferring  marks.  A  mark  in  the  wrong 
place  means  two  errors  uncorrected  in  place  of  one  cor- 
rected. 

In  sending  out  proofs,  see  that  everything  is  there. 
Arrange  the  copy  and  proof-sheets  neatly  and  consecu- 
tively. 

When  sending  out  proofs,  consult  the  job  ticket  for  the 
number  wanted,  and  the  name  and  address  of  the  person 
to  whom  they  are  to  be  sent.  If  no  number  is  mentioned, 
send  two ;  if  no  address  is  given,  send  to  the  editor  (or  the 
person  regularly  receiving  them). 

Unless  otherwise  directed,  as  soon  as  you  have  an  article 
completed,  send  it  out.  Don't  wait  until  you  have  "a 
whole  lot. " 

The  manuscript  should  accompany  the  galley-proof; 
the  foul  proof  (author's  marked  galley-proof)  should 
accompany  the  page-proof.  In  case  no  galley-proof  has 
been  sent,  the  manuscript  should  accompany  the  page- 
proof. 


Manual  of  Style:    Appendix  105 

Indicate  in  the  lower  left-hand  corner  the  contents  of 
all  the  envelopes  you  address. 

Fasten  your  pins  in  the  center  at  the  top,  not  diago- 
nally in  the  left-hand  corner,  thus  covering  up  the  direc- 
tions, etc.,  often  written  there. 

Return  every  evening  to  the  file  01  the  book-case  any 
volume  that  may  have  been  taken  out  for  reference  during 
the  day. 

Remember  that  you  are  the  housekeeper  of  the  proof- 
room, and  take  pride  in  its  neat  and  orderly  appearance. 
Keeping  the  records,  files,  etc.,  naturally  devolves  upon 
you.  Perfect  your  system  so  that  everything  can  be 
located  at  a  moment's  notice.  The  more  of  that  kind  of 
work  you  do  without  being  asked,  and  the  better  you  do 
it,  the  more  you  will  be  appreciated. 


io6  The  University  of  Chicago  Press 


COM 


PROOFREADERS  MARKS 

Put  in  capitolst' 

Put  in  'SMKEL  CAPITALS? 


AJ'. 


i.e.        P^t  in  LOWER  CASE. 
jurrr,.      Put  in  reman'  type. 
dot.       Put  in  italio  t3rpe. 
6<iCci       Put  JP  bold  face  type. 
^        Dele,  or  delete :  take  X  out. 
9        Letter  ^versed — turn. 
Q  /  <J   Indent.    J^ake  a  new  paragraph. 
4t         Put  inspace. 
O       Close  up — no  space. 
N>X      Bad   spacing :5paceinore  evenly. 

I,     Wrong  foj^t:  character  of  wrong  size  or  style* 
\jj       Transp^(|e. 
d       [Tarry  to  the  left. 

I  CJrry  to  the  right, 
rn      'gfevate. 
D^epress. 

Ij6perfect  letter — correct. 
Space  shows|between  wofds — shove  down. 
Straighten^  crooked  line. 
^^    Restore  or  retain  words  crossed  out. 
^      Print  (£^,  li,  etc.)  as  a  logotype, 
oat-iet  coU  Words  are  omitted  from,  or  in,  xopy. 
(T)     Query  to  author;  Is  this  right  ? 


INDEX 


INDEX 

[The  numbers,  unless  otherwise  indicated,  refer  to  sections] 


"A"  and  "an":  use  of,  before  h  and  «, 
104;   spacing  of,  249. 

"a-"  (negative  particle),  compounds  with, 
188. 

Abbreviations:  in  literary  references,  100; 
of  biblical  books,  list  of,  99;  of  names 
of  states,  96;  of  titles  of  publications, 
omission  of  period  after  initials  used  for, 
no;  rules  for,  96-101;  use  of  apos- 
trophe in,  no;   of  period  after,  no. 

"-able"  and  "-ible,"  in  di\isions,  207. 

Academic  degrees,  abbreviation  and  capi- 
taUzation  of,  19,  20. 

Accents,  retention  of,  in  foreign  words 
incorporated  into  English,  51. 

Acts,  juridical,  capitalization  of  names  of, 
16. 

A.  D.  (anno  domini):  spacing  of,  45,  202, 
250;  use  of  small  caps  for,  45. 

Address:  capitalization  of  titles  in  direct, 
19. 

Address  line:  at  end  of  letters,  etc.,  how  to 
set,  43;  at  opening  of  letters,  etc.,  how 
to  set,  54;  omission  of  comma  after, 
145- 

Addresses,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  37;  to  be  roman- 
quoted,  72. 

Adjectives:  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of 
pubUcations,  37;  compound,  167;  end- 
ing in  "-ical,"  how  to  divide,  212; 
omission  of  comma  between  two,  133; 
proper,  capitaUzation  of,  i  (cf.  3,  46). 

Administrative  bodies,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  11. 

Adverbial  clauses,  136. 

Adverbs:  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of 
publications,  37;  ending  in  "-ly,"  not 
to  be  hyphenated  with  adjectives  or  par- 
ticiples, 167;  use  of  comma  in  connec- 
tion with,  132. 

ffi,  rules  for  use  of,  105. 

Ages:  historical,  linguistic,  and  geological, 
capitalization  of,  12;  to  be  spelled  out, 
89. 


Algebraic  formulae:  letters  used  to  desig- 
nate unknown  quantities  in,  57;  spacing 
of,  254. 

Alignment,  quotation  marks  to  be 
"cleared"  in,  80. 

Alliances,  political,  capitalization  of  names 

of,  14. 
Alphabetizing  of  names,  rules  for,  83. 

A.  M.  {ante  meridiem):  spacing  of,  45,  202 
250;   use  of  small  caps  for,  45. 

American  system  of  divisions,  204. 

"Ampers  and":    definition  of,  97;    when 

used,  97. 
And:    "short,"  97;    when  to  use  comma 

before,  130. 

Anglicized    derivatives    from    Latin    and 

Greek,  form  of  diphthongs  a  and  ce  in, 

105. 
"Ante,"  compounds  with,  191. 
"Anti,"  compoimds  with,  191. 
Antithetical  clauses,  135. 
Apocrypha:   Ust  of  abbreviations  for,  99; 

titles  of,  to  be  set  in  roman,  52. 
Apostles,  omission  of  "St."  in  connection 

with  names  of,  98. 

Apostrophe:  rules  for  use  of ,  147-49;  use 
of,  in  abbreviations,  no;  to  form 
plural  of  numerals,  149;  to  form  pos- 
sessive, 148  (cf.  103);  to  mark  omis- 
sion of  figures  or  letters,  147  (cf.  no), 

Appositional  clauses,  136. 
Arabic  numerals,  spacing  of,  at  beginning 
of  paragraphs,  252. 

Art,  titles  of  works  of,  to  be  roman- 
quoted,  74. 

Article:  definite,  not  to  be  used  in  connec- 
tion with  "Rev."  and  "Hon.,"  82; 
not  to  be  treated  as  part  of  title  of  peri- 
odicals, 37;  indefinite,  form  of,  before 
eu,  sounded  fe,  "one,"  etc.,  and  long  m, 
104. 

Articles,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  37;  to  be  roman- 
quoted,  72. 


109 


no  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


Artificial  noun-formations,  plural  of,  149. 

Artistic  schools  .capitalization  of  names  of ,  7 . 

"As  follows,"  use  of  colon  in  connection 
with,  119. 

Asterisk,  use  of,  for  footnote  index,  214. 

Astronomical  terms:  capitalization  of, 
41;  use  of  italics  for,  61. 

A  strophysical  Journal:  connecting  num- 
bfers  in,  157  note;  metric  and  chemical 
symbols  in,  no  note;  style ior  footnotes 
in,  220  note;  use  of  comma  with  figiures 
in,  143  note. 

Authors:  hints  to,  pp.  95-98;  names  of,  if 
in  text,  not  repeated  in  footnotes,  216. 

Bastard  title:    see  Half-title. 

B.C.  ("before  Christ"):  spacing  of,  45, 
202,  250;  use  of  small  caps  for,  45. 

"Bi-,"  compounds  with,  181. 

Bible:  books  of,  abbreviations  for,  99; 
capitalization  of  names  for,  2j;  titles 
of  books  of,  to  be  capitalized,  27;  to  be 
set  in  roman,  52. 

Biblical :  books,  abbreviations  for,  99,  and 
capitalization  of  names  of,  27;  parables, 
capitalization  of,  28;  terms,  miscel- 
laneous, capitalization  of,  29. 

Bills,  legislative,  capitalization  of,  16. 

Biological  terms,  use  of  capitals  in,  40. 

Black-face:  see  Bold-face  type. 

Blank  verse,  indention  of,  256. 

Blanks,  use  of  leaders  for,  in  columns  of 
figures,  225. 

Blocks,  capitalization  of  names  of,  6. 

Bodies:  legislative,  judiciary,  and  admin- 
istrative, capitalization  of  names  of,  10; 
military,  numbers  of,  to  be  spelled 
out,  90. 

Bold-face  type:  defined,  236;  how  indi- 
cated, 236. 

"Book,"  compounds  of,  170. 

Books:  biblical,  abbreviation  of,  99,  and 
capitaUzation  of,  27;  capitalization  of 
titles  of,  37;   italics  for  titles  of.  52. 

Botanical  Gazette:  exception  to  rule  for  capi- 
talization of  titles  of  publications  in,  37 
note;  to  hyphenization  of  compounds 
of  "co-,"etc.,  187  note;  to  rule  for  italics, 
52  note;  to  rule  for  quotation  marks,  72 
note;  metric  symbols  in,  no  note; 
footnotes  in,  220  note;  thousands  in, 
143  note. 


Botanical  terms:  use  of  capitals  in,  40; 
of  italics,  40,  6 1. 

Bourgeois,  explained,  233. 

Box-heads:  defined,  263;  how  to  set, 
222;  illustrated,  231;  omission  of 
period  after,  112;  use  of  capitals  in, 
37. 

Brackets,  rules  for  use  of,  162,  163. 

Break,  or  change,  in  sentence,  to  be  indi- 
cated by  dash,  150. 

Breakline:  defined,  200;  spacing  of,  248. 

Brevier,  explained,  233. 

"Brother,"  compounds  of,  174. 

"Brothers,"  forming  part  of  name  of 
firm,  97. 

Buildings,  capitaUzation  of  names  of,  6. 

But-clauses,  use  of  comma  in  connection 
with,  131. 

"By-,"  compounds  with,  186. 

C,  soft,  do  not  divide  on,  206. 

Capitalization:  of  abbreviations  of  aca- 
demic degrees,  etc.,  20;  of  books  of  the 
Bible,  27;  of  conventions,  congresses, 
expositions,  etc.,  15;  of  creeds  and  con- 
fessions of  faith,  17;  of  Egyptian  dynas- 
ties, 11;  of  feast-days,  i8;  of  geographi- 
cal names,  2,  3;  of  geological  epochs, 
12;  of  governmental  departments,  10; 
of  historical  epochs,  12;  of  important 
events,  13;  of  legislative,  judiciary,  and 
administrative  bodies,  10;  of  Unguistic 
and  literary  periods,  12;  of  miscella- 
neous bibUcal  terms,  29;  of  miscella- 
neous historical  terms,  14;  of  monastic 
orders,  8;  of  names  for  the  Bible,  25; 
of  names  of  regiments,  11;  of  "nature," 
etc.,  and  abstract  ideas,  personified,  22; 
of  nouns  and  adjectives  used  to  desig- 
nate the  Supreme  Being,  or  any  member 
of  the  Trinity,  21;  of  organizations 
and  institutions,  9,  lo;  of  philosophical, 
literary,  and  artistic  schools,  7;  of 
political  alliances,  14;  of  political 
divisions,  4,  s;  of  political  parties,  7; 
of  pronouns  referring  to  the  Supreme 
Being,  21;  of  proper  nouns  and  adjec- 
tives, I,  3,  46;  of  regions  or  parts  of 
world,  3;  of  religious  denominations,  7; 
of  sessions  of  Congress,  n ;  of  thorough- 
fares, parks,  squares,  blocks,  buildings, 
etc.,  6;  of  titles,  academic  degrees, 
orders  (decorations),  etc.,  19  (cf.  42);  of 
titles  of  publications,  37;  of  treaties, 
acts,  laws,  bills,  etc.,  16;  of  versions  of 
the  Bible,  26;  rules  for,  1-49- 


Manual  o  j  Style:    Index 


III 


Capitals:  how  indicated,  238;  rules  for 
use  of .  1-42. 

CapitcJs  and  small  capitals,  rules  for  use 
of,  43,  44,  220,  222. 

Caps:  see  Capitals. 

Center-heads:  defined,  260;  illustrated, 
260;  use  of  capitals  in,  37. 

Centuries, numbers  of  ,to  be  spelled  out, go* 

Cf.,  to  be  set  in  roman,  53. 

Chapters,  titles  of  :  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  37;  to  be  roman- 
quoted,  72. 

Chemical  symbols,  how  to  treat,  no. 

Christian  names,  to  be  spelled  out,  83. 

"Church,"  when  capitalized,  24. 

Church  fathers:  omission  of  "St."  in  con- 
nection with  names  of,  98;  when  capi- 
talized, 23. 

Citations:  from  different  authors  follow- 
ing each  other  uninterrupted  by  any 
intervening  original  matter,  65;  of  pas- 
sages in  author's  own  words,  64  (cf. 
75);  rules  for  reduction  of,  75-77;  for 
punctuation  of,  102. 

Civil  titles,  capitalization  of,  19. 

Classical  Journal,  form  of  footnotes  in, 
220  note. 

Classical  Philology,  form  of  footnotes 
in,  220  note. 

Clauses:  adverbial,  136;  antithetical, 
i35'»  appositional,  136;  complemen- 
tary, 153;  conjunctive,  131;  paren- 
thetical, 136,  151,  153,  161;  participial, 
134;  summarizing,  154. 

"Cleared,"  definition  of,  80. 

"Co-,"  compounds  with,  187. 

Colon:  definition  and  illustration  of  use 
of,  ii8;  rules  for  use  of,  118-23;  use 
of,  after  salutatory  phrase  at  beginning 
of  letters,  120;  between  place  of  publi- 
cation and  publisher's  name,  122;  in 
connection  with  introductory  remarks 
of  speaker,  120;  to  emphasize  close 
coimection  between  two  clauses,  118; 
to  introduce  statement,  extract,  etc., 
n8;  to  separate  chapter  and  verse  in 
Scripture  passages,  121;  clause  from 
illustration  or  amplification,  118;  hours 
and  minutes  in  time  indications,  121. 

Columns  of  figures,  spacing  of,  225. 

Combination  of  words  into  one  adjective 
preceding  noun,  use  of  hyphen  for,  167. 

Comma:     definition  and  illustrations  of 


use  of,  128;  omission  of,  between  two 
adjectives,  133;  in  .signatures  and  after 
author's  name  at  beginning  of  articles. 
14s;  use  of,  after  digits  indicating 
thousands,  143;  before  "and,"  "or," 
and  "nor,"  130;  before  "of"  in  con- 
nection with  residence  or  position,  142; 
between  consecutive  pages,  etc.,  143; 
between  month  and  year,  144;  in  con- 
nection with  adjectival  phrases,  138; 
with  adverbial  clauses,  136;  with  anti- 
thetical clauses,  135;  with  appositional 
clauses,  136;  with  clauses  ending  in 
different  prepositions,  139;  with  con- 
junctions, 131;  with  conjunctions,  ad- 
verbs, connective  particles,  and  phrases, 
132;  with  parenthetical  clauses,  136; 
with  participial  clauses,  134;  to  indicate 
omissions,  141 ;  to  separate  identical,  or 
similar,  words,  137;  to  separate  num- 
bers, 140;  to  separate  proper  nouns, 
129;  rules  for  use  of,  128-46. 

Commercial:  firms,  how  to  treat  titles  of, 
97;  organizations  and  institutions,  capi- 
talization of  names  of,  9. 

"Company,"  to  be  abbreviated  when 
forming  part  of  name  of  firm,  97. 

Complementary  clauses,  use  of  dashes  in 
connection  with,  153. 

Component  elements,  omission  of,  in  com- 
pound words,  194. 

Compound  adjectives,   167. 

Compound  words,  omission  of  element 
common  to  two  or  more,  to  be  indicated 
by  hyphen,  194. 

Compounds:  hyphenated,  capitalization 
of  nouns  constituting  parts  of, 
in  titles,  39;  of  "book,"  "house," 
"miU,"  "room,"  "shop,"  "work," 
170;  of  "father,"  "mother,"  "brother," 
"sister,"  "daughter,"  "parent."  and 
"foster,"  174;  of  "fellow,"  173;  of 
"god,"  179;  of  "half,"  "quarter,"  etc., 
180;  of  "life"  and  "world,"  176;  of 
I' maker"  and  "dealer,"  171;  of 
"master,"  178;  of  present  participles 
with  noims  or  prepositions,  169;  of 
"self,"  182;  of  "skin,"  177;  of  "store," 
172;  with  "ante,"  "anti,"  "inter," 
"intra,"  "post,"  "sub,"  and  "super," 
191;  with  "by-,"  186,  with  "co-," 
"pre-,"  and  "re-,"  187;  with  "e.\tra," 
"infra,"  "supra,"  and  "ultra,"  192; 
with  "fold,"  183;  with  "great"  in  lines 
of  descent,  175;  with  "like,"  184; 
with  negative  particles  "un-,"  "in-," 
and  "a-,"  188;  with  "non-,"  188; 
with  "over"  and  "under,"  190;    with 


112  The   University  o  j  Chicago  Press 


"quasi,"  189;  with  "semi."  "demi," 
"tri,"  "bi,"  etc.,  181;  with  "vice," 
"ex-,"  "elect,"  "general,"  and  "lieu- 
tenant," in  titles.  185. 

Confessions    of    faith,    capitalization    of 

names  of,  17. 
Congress:      capitalization   of   names   of 

houses    of,    10;     of    sessions    of,    11; 

members    of,    to    be    lower-cased,    19; 

numbers  of  sessions  of,  to  be  spelled 

out,  90. 
Congresses,  capitalization  of  names  of,  15. 

Conjunctions,  use  of  comma  in  connection 

with,  132. 
Connective   particles,   use   of   comma   in 

cormection  with,  132. 
"  Continued":  after  headlines,  to  be  set  in 

italics,  63;  at  end  of  articles,  etc.,  to  be 

placed  between  brackets,  163. 

Contraction  of  word,  use  of  apostrophe 

in,  147. 
Conventions,  capitalization  of  names  of ,  15. 
Copyholders,  hints  to,  pp.  103-5. 
Creeds,  capitalization  of  names  of,  17. 

Cut-in-heads:    defined    and    illustrated, 

262;  omission  of  period  after,  112;  use 

of  capitals  in,  37. 
Cycles  of  poems,  titles  of:    capitalization 

of  principal  words  in,  37;    to  be  itaU- 

cized,  52. 

'Czar,"  when  capitalized,  19. 

Dagger,  use  of,  for  footnote  index,  214. 

Danish  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  37. 

Dashes:  definition  and  illustrations  of  use 
of,  150;  different  sizes  of ,  explained,  239- 
41;  illustrated,  244;  rules  for  use  of, 
150-59;  use  of,  at  end  of  word  or  phrase 
implied  at  beginning  of  each  of  succeed- 
ing paragraphs,  155;  for  emphasis,  152; 
in  connection  with  Uterary  references, 
158;  with  other  points,  159;  with 
parenthetical  clauses,  151,  153;  with 
complementary  clauses,  153;  to  connect 
numbers,  157;  to  denote  break,  stop, 
transition,  or  change  in  sentence,  150; 
to  precede  summarizing  clauses,  154. 

Dates:  of  publications,  to  follow  volume 
numbers,  in  references  to  periodicals, 
2 19;  st,  d,  and  th  to  be  omitted  from,  92 ; 
use  of  comma  between  month  and  year 
in,  144. 

"Daughter,"  compounds  of,  174. 


"De"  and  "von,"  rule  for  treatment  of, 83, 

"Dealer,"  compounds  of,  171. 

Decades,  references  to,  to  be  spelled  out, 
91. 

Decorations,  capitalization  of  names  of,  19. 

Degrees,  academic,  abbreviation  and  capi- 
talization of,  19,  20. 

"Demi,"  compoimds  with,  181. 

Denominations,  religious,  capitalization 
of  names  of ,  7. 

Departments:  governmental,  capitaliza- 
tion of  names  of,  10;  of  University  of 
Chicago,  42. 

Derivation,  division  according  to,  204,  205. 

Derivatives:  from  Greek  and  Latin.  105; 
from  proper  names,  46;  from  words 
ending  in /,  how  to  divide,  210. 

Diagrams,  letters  referring  to,  58. 

Digraphs,  rules  for  use  of,  105. 

Diphthongs,  to  be  treated  as  one  letter  in 

divisions,  209. 
Divided  word  to  be  avoided:    at  end  of 

next  to  last  line  of  paragraph,  200;   at 

bottom  of  recto  page,  200. 

Division  of  words:  rules  for,  198-213; 
systems  of,  204;  use  of  hyphen  to  indi- 
cate, 166. 

Divisional  mark  in  middle  of  sentences, 
not  to  be  put  at  end  of  line,  203. 

Divisions:  avoidance  of  unnecessary,  198; 
on  two  letters,  to  be  avoided,  199;  rules 
for,  198-213. 

Divisions  of  pubUcations.titlesof :  capitali- 
zation of  principal  words  in,  37;  to  be 
roman-quoted,  72. 

Divisions:  poKtical,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  4,  5;  numbered,  to  be  spelled  out, 
90;  of  University  of  Chicago,  capitali- 
zation of  names  of,  42. 

Documents,  titles  of:  capitaHzation  of 
principal  words  in,  37;  to  be  italicized, 
52  (cf.  16). 

Double  dagger,  use  of,  for  footnote 
index,  214. 

Double  rules,  use  of,  in  tables,  228. 

Doubt,  use  of  interrogation  point  to  ex- 
press, 116. 

Drop-folio,  defined,  272. 

Dutch  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  37. 

Dynasties,  Egyptian:  capitaHzation  of 
names  of ,  11;  to  be  spelled  out,  90. 


Manual  of  Style:     Index 


113 


Editors,  hints  to,  pp.  95-98. 

Educational  organizations  and  institu- 
tions, capitalization  of  names  of,  9. 

E.g.:  spacing  of,  2  50;  to  be  set  inroman,53. 

"Elect,"  suffixed  to  titles,  185. 

Ellipses:  rules  for  use  of,  164,  165;  to  be 
treated  as  part  of  quotation,  78,  165; 
use  of,  to  indicate  omissions,  164. 

Em,  defined,  239. 

Em-dash:  defined,  239;  illustrated,  244; 
use  of,  for  "to"  in  time  indications,  157. 

Emphasis:  use  of  dashes  for,  152;  of 
exclamation  points,  114;  of  italics.  50. 

Em-quad,  defined,  239;  illustrated,  244. 

En-dash:  defined,  241;  illustrated,  244; 
use  of,  instead  of  hyphen,  in  compounds, 
167;  for  "to"  connecting  two  words  or 
figures,  157. 

English:  equivalent  of  foreign  word  or 
phrase,  to  be  quoted,  68;  system  of 
division,  204;  titles  of  publications,  use 
of  capitals  in,  37. 

En-quad:  defined,  241;  illustrated,  244. 

Enumerations,  use  of  parentheses  in  con- 
nection with  letters  or  figures  used  to 
indicate  subdivisions  in,  160. 

Epigrammatic  turn,  use  of  dash  to  indi- 
cate, 150. 

Epochs,  historical  and  geological ,  capitali- 
zation of  names  of,  12. 

Equivalent,  English,  of  word  or  phrase 
from  foreign  language,  to  be  roman- 
quoted,  68. 

Essays,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  37;  to  be  italicized,  52. 

Etc.:  use  of  comma  before,  130;  when 
to  be  treated  as  part  of  quotation,  78. 

Etymology,  di\'ision  according  to  (Eng- 
lish system),  204. 

CM,  form  of  indefinite  article  before.  104. 

Even  spacing,  importance  of,  245. 

Events,  important  historical,  capitaliza- 
tion of  names  of,  13. 

"Ex-,"  prefixed  to  titles,  185. 

Exclamation  point,  rules  for  use  of,  114, 

lis- 
Explanation:    of  technical  terms,  232-75; 

use  of  brackets  for,  162. 

Expositions,  capitaUzation  of  names  of,  15. 
"Extra,"  compounds  with,  192. 
Extracts,  rules  for  punctation  of,  102. 


F.,  ff.  (=  "following"):  spacing  of,  250; 
use  of,  100. 

Face,  defined,  237. 

"Farther"  and  "further,"  differentiation 
of,  106. 

"Father":  compounds  of,  174;  when 
capitalized,  23. 

Feast-days,  capitalization  of  names  of,  i8. 

"Fellow,"  compounds  of,  173. 

Figures:  columns  of,  in  tables,  225;  rules 
for  use  of,  84-88. 

Figures  (illustrations)  in  text,  letters  re- 
ferring to,  58. 

Firms,  names  of  commercial:  abbrevia- 
tion of,  97;   capitalization  of,  9. 

First  words:  after  a  colon,  when  capital- 
ized, 31;  following  'Whereas"  and 
"Resolved"  in  resolutions,  capitali- 
zation of,  35;  in  sections  of  enumera- 
tion, when  capitalized,  32;  in  titles  of 
publications,  capitalization  of,  37;  of 
citations,  when  capitalized,  34  (cf.  118); 
of  lines  of  poetry,  capitaUzation  of,  30; 
of  quotations,  when  lower-case  is  used 
for,  49  (cf.  118);  of  sentences,  capitaU- 
zation of,  30. 

Five-em  space,  defined,  243. 

"Flush,"  defined,  261. 

"Fold,"  combinations  with,  183. 

FoUo,  defined,  272. 

Font,  defined,  238. 

Footnotes:  exceptions  to  general  style 
for,  220  note;  general  style  for,  218; 
indices  for  references  to,  214;  number- 
ing of,  220;  rules  for,  214-20;  samples 
of,  218. 

Foreign  institutions  and  organizations, 
capitalization  of  titles  of,  9. 

Foreign  languages:  EngUsh  translation 
accompanying  word,  phrase,  or  passage 
cited  from,  to  be  quoted,  68;  sentences 
and  passages  quoted  from,  how  to  treat, 
51.  75;  words  and  phrases  from,  use  of 
italics  for.  51;  words  and  phrases  bor- 
rowed from,  incorporated  into  English, 
how  to  treat,  51;   Ust  of,  51. 

Foreign  titles  of  pubUcations,  capitaliza- 
tion of,  37. 

"Format"  of  books  (4to,  8vo,  etc.),  not 
to  be  treated  as  abbreviations,  no. 

Formulae,  spacing  of,  254. 

"Fort,"  to  be  speUed  out,  94. 

"Foster,"  compounds  of,  174. 


114 


The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 


Foul  proof,  defined,  269. 

Foundry-proof,  defined,  268. 

Four-em  space,  defined,  243. 

Fractions,  use  of  hyphen  in,  193. 

French:  titles  of  pubUcations,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  37;  use  of  ligature  m  in,  105. 

"Further"  and  "farther,"  differentiation 
of,  106. 

G,  soft,  do  not  divide  on,  206. 

Galley,  defined,  266. 

Galley-proof,  defined,  266. 

"General,"  combined  with  title,  185. 

Geographical  names,  capitalization  of,  2 , 3. 

Geological  terms,  capitalization  of,  12. 

Geology,  Journal  of,  metric  symbols  in, 
no  note. 

Geometry,  letters  used  to  designate  lines, 
etc.,  in,  57. 

German  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  37. 

Given  names:  see  Christian  names. 

"God,"  compounds  of,  179. 

Governmental  departments,  capitalization 
of  names  of,  10. 

Grain,  abbreviation  for,  10 1. 

Gram,  abbreviation  for,  10 1. 

"Great,"  compounds  of,  175. 

H,  form  of  indefinite  article  before  sounded, 
104. 

Hair-space,  defined,  244. 

Hair-spacing,  tabooed,  247. 

"Half,"  combinations  of,  with  nouns,  180. 

Half-title,  defined,  273. 

Hanging  indention:  defined  and  illus- 
trated, 260,  26s;  indention  in,  255. 

Headings,  described,  260-64. 

HeadUnes:  of  tables,  how  to  set,  230; 
omission  of  period  after,  112;  spacing 
of,  252;  word  "continued"  following, 
to  be  set  in  italics,  63. 

Heads:    see  Headings,  Headlines. 

Historical:  epochs,  capitalization  of  appel- 
lations for,  12;  events,  capitalization  of , 
13;  terms  of  special  significance,  capi- 
talization of,  14. 

Holidays:    see  Feast-days. 

Honorary  titles,  capitalization  of,  19. 

"House,"  compounds  of,  170. 


Hyphen  leader,  defined,  224. 

Hyphenated  words:  division  of,  to  be 
avoided,  208;   list  of,  197. 

Hyphenization,  rules  for,  i66-07- 

Hyphens:  number  of  consecutive,  allow- 
able at  ends  of  lines,  200;  rules  for  use 
of,  166-97. 

Ibid.,  use  of,  215. 

Ideas,  abstract,  capitaUzation  of,  when 
personified,  22. 

I.e.:  spacing  of,  250;  to  be  set  in  roman, 

53- 
If-clauses,  use   of  comma   in  connection 

with,  131. 

Illustrations,  letters  referring  to  parts  of, 
58. 

Implication  of  word  or  phrase,  to  be  indi- 
cated by  dash,  155. 

Importance,  use  of  italics  for,  50. 

"In-"  (negative  particle),  compounds 
with,  188. 

Indentation:  see  Indention. 

Indention:  explained,  255;  rules  for, 
255-57. 

Indices  for  footnote  references:  how  to 
number,  220;  placing  of,  217;  sequence 
of,  214;  what  to  use  for,  217. 

Industrial  organizations  and  institutions, 
capitalization  of  names  of,  9. 

"Infra,"  compounds  with,  192. 

Initials:  of  titles  of  publications,  use  of, 
no;  separation  of,  in  different  lines,  to 
be  avoided,  202. 

Institutions:  capitahzation  of  names 'of, 
9;  use  of  roman  type  for  foreign,  51. 

"Inter,"  compounds  with,  191. 

Interpolations,  use  of  brackets  for,  162. 

Interrogation  point,  use  of,  116,  117. 

"Intra,"  compounds  with,  191. 

Ironical  word  or  phrase:  use  of  quotation 
marks  for,  67;  of  exclamation  point, 
114. 

Italian  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  37. 

Italics:  defined,  235;  how  indicated,  235; 
rules  for  use  of,  50-63. 

J,  do  not  divide  on,  206. 
Journals;   see  Periodicals. 


Manual  of  Style:    I  nd  d  x 


115 


Judiciary  bodies,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  10. 

Juridical  acts,  laws,  bills,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  16. 

"Justification,"  defined,  245. 

"  Kaiser,"  when  capitalized,  19. 
Kern,  defined,  237. 

Lanston:    see  Monotype. 

Last  words,  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of 
publications,  37. 

Latin:  non-use  of  ligature  <?  and  as  in, 
105;  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  37. 

Laws,  juridical,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  16. 

"  Leaded,"  defined,  258. 

Leaders:   definition  and  use  of,  224. 

Leads:   defined,  258;  use  of,  259. 

Lectures,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  37-,  to  be  roman-quoted, 

72. 

Legends,  omission  of  period  after,  112. 

Legislative  bodies,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  10. 

Letters:  in  text  or  legends  referring  to 
corresponding  letters  in  accompanying 
illustrations  (diagrams),  58;  references 
to  particular,  to  be  set  in  italics,  59. 

"Lieutenant,"  combined  with  other  title, 

185. 
"Life,"  compounds  of,  176. 
Ligature  ce  and  ce,  use  of,  105. 
"Like,"  adjectives  ending  in,  184. 

Linguistic  periods :  abbreviation  of  names 
for,  no;   capitalization  of,  12. 

Linotype  machine  (Mergenthaler) :  de- 
scribed, 274;  how  to  number  footnotes 
in  matter  set  on,  220;  use  of  leaders  in 
tables  set  on,  224. 

List:  of  hyphenated  words,  197;  of  words 
of  more  than  one  spelHng,  107. 

Literary  references:  abbreviations  in,  97; 
list  of  phrases  and  abbre\'iations  used 
in,  53- 

Literary  schools,  capitaHzation  of  names 
of,  7. 

Loc.  cit.,  use  of,  215. 

Long  primer,  explained,  233. 

Lower-case:  defined,  238;  rules  for  use 
of,  46-49. 


Machines,  type-setting,  different  styles 
of,  274,  275. 

Magazines:  see  Periodicals. 

"Maker,"  compounds  of,  171. 

Make-up,  defined,  271. 

"Manuscript,"  abbreviation  for,  38,  no. 

Manuscripts,  titles  of:  to  be  set  in  roman, 

52;  use  of  capitals  in,  38. 
"Master,"  compounds  of,  178. 
Mathematical  signs,  spacing  of,  254. 
Measures,  metric,  how  to  designate,  loi. 
Mergenthaler:    see  Linotype. 

Metric:  symbols,  how  to  treat,  no; 
spacing  of,  250;  system,  designation 
of  weights  and  measures  in,  10 1. 

Military  titles,  capitalization  of,  19. 

"Mill,"  compounds  of,  170. 

Minion,  explained,  233. 

Monastic  orders,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  8. 

Monetary  symbols,  spacing  of,  251. 

Money,  sums  of,  how  to  treat,  87. 

Monotype  machine  (Lanston),  described, 

275- 

Months,  names  of,  when  to  be  spelled 
out,  92. 

"Mother,"  compounds  of,  174. 

Mottoes:  capitaUzation  of  principal  words 
in,  37;  to  be  roman-quoted,  72. 

"Mount,"  to  be  spelled  out,  94. 

Movements,  historical,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  14. 

"Namely,"  use  of  colon  in  connection 
with,  119. 

Names:  alphabetization  of,  83;  Christian, 
to  be  spelled  out,  83;  familiar,  applied 
to  particular  persons,  to  be  capitahzed, 
19;    proper,  capitalization  of,  i. 

Nature,  personified,  capitalization  of,  22. 

Negative  particles  "un-,"  "in-,"  and 
"a-,"  compounds  with,  188. 

Newspapers,  titles  of:  capitalization  of 
principal  words  in.  37;  to  be  italicized, 
52. 

New  Testament  books,  list  of  abbrevia- 
tions for,  99. 

Nobility,  capitalization  of  titles  of,  19. 

"Non-,"  compounds  with,  188. 

Nonpareil,  explained,  233. 


ii6  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


"Nor,"  when  comma  is  used  before,  130. 

"Not,"  use  of  comma  before,  in  anti- 
thetical clauses,  135. 

"Note"  introducing  note  not  a  footnote, 
use  of  cap  and  small  caps  for,  44. 

"Nothing,"  do  not  divide,  213. 

Nouns:  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of  pub- 
lications, 37;  combination  of,  standing 
in  objective  relation  to  each  other,  168; 
ending  in  a  sibilant,  formation  of  plural 
of,  149;  followed  by  numeral,  capitali- 
zation of,  33  (cf.  100);  proper,  capi- 
talization of,  I  (cf.  3,  46). 

Numbered  political  divisions,  capitaliza- 
tion of  names  of,  5. 

Numbers:  commencing  a  sentence,  to  be 
spelled  out,  86;  consecutive,  treatment 
of,  143,  157;  in  connected  groups  to  be 
treated  alike,  84;  in  groups  of  six  or 
more,  closely  connected,  to  be  set  in 
figures,  84;  of  less  than  three  digits,  to 
be  spelled  out  in  ordinary  reading - 
matter,  84;  round,  treatment  of,  85;  use 
of  comma  after  digits  indicating  thou- 
sands, 143;  use  of  comma  to  separate, 
140;  use  of  dash  for  "to"  connecting, 
157- 

Numerals:  Arabic,  at  beginning  of  lines, 
spacing  of,  252;  Roman,  at  beginning 
of  lines  and  in  headlines,  spacing  of, 
252;  omission  of  period  after,  iii. 

"0"  and  "Oh,"  capitalization  of,  36. 

Occupation,  compounds  denoting,  171. 

ce,  rules  for  use  of,  105. 

Ofl&ces,  capitalization  of  names  of,  10,  19, 

Officers:  titles  of,  to  be  lower-cased,  19-, 
of  University  of  Chicago,  to  be  capi- 
talized, 42. 

Old  Testament  books,  list  of  abbrevia- 
tions for,  99. 

Omission:  of  comma  after  signatures, 
etc.,  14s;  of  figiu-es  in  numbers  or  letters 
in  middle  of  word,  use  of  apostrophe 
for,  147;  of  period  after  headlines,  etc., 
112;  after  Roman  numerals,  in;  of  st, 
d,  and  th  in  dates,  92;  of  word  or 
words,  indicated  by  comma,  141;  use  of 
brackets  for,  162;  of  ellipsis,  164. 

"One,"  "once,"  etc.,  form  of  indefinite 
article  before,  104. 

Op.  cit.,  use  of,  215. 

Open  tables:  headlines  for,  222;  how  to 
set,  221;    specimen  of,  231. 


"Or,"  when  comma  is  used  before,  130. 

Orders  (decorations),  capitaUzation  of 
names  of,  19. 

Orders,  monastic,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  8. 

Ordinals:  when  capitalized,  12;  when 
not,  39. 

Organizations,  capitaHzation  of  names  of, 

9. 
Outcry, use  of  exclamation  point  after,  114. 
"Over,"  compounds  with,  190. 

Pages,  etc.,  use  of  comma  between  con- 
secutive, 143;  of  dash,  157. 

Page-proof,  defined,  267. 

Pamphlets,  titles  of:  capitaUzation  of 
principal  words  in,  37;  to  be  itaHcized, 
52. 

Papers  (addresses),  titles  of:  capitaliza- 
tion of  principal  words  in,  37;  to  be 
roman-quoted,  72. 

Parables,  biblical,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  28. 

Paragraph  mark:  spacing  of,  250;  use  of, 
for  footnote  index,  214. 

Paragraphs:  explained,  265;  first  lines  of, 
in  quoted  prose  matter  to  begin  with 
quotation  marks,  79;  indention  of,  255; 
styles  of,  257  (cf.  265). 

Parallel  mark,  use  of,  for  footnote  index, 

214. 
"Parent,"  compounds  of,  174. 

Parentheses:  rules  for  use  of,  160,  161; 
use  of,  for  parenthetical  clauses,  i6i 
(cf.  136, 151);  in  connection  with  figures 
or  letters  indicating  subsections,  160. 

Parenthesis:  placing  of  period  in  connec- 
tion with,  113;  within  parenthesis,  use 
of  brackets  for,  162. 

Parenthetical  clauses:  use  of  commas  in 
connection  with,  136;  of  dashes,  151, 
153;  of  parentheses,  161  (cf.  136, 
151). 

Parks,  capitalization  of  names  of,  6. 

Participial  clauses,  use  of  comma  in  con- 
nection with,  134. 

Participle,  present,  united  with  noun,  or 
with  preposition,  169. 

Parties,  pohtical,  capitaHzation  of  names 
of,  7. 

Parts  (of  books,  etc.),  titles  of:  capitali- 
zation of  principal  words  in,  37;  to  be 
roman-quoted,  72. 


Manual  o  j  Style:    Index 


117 


Pause,  use  of  dash  to  indicate,  150. 

Pearl,  explained,  233. 

Pence:    see  Shillings. 

Per  cent.:  to  be  followed  by  figures, 
84;  to  be  treated  as  an  abbreviation, 
110. 

Period:  placing  of,  in  connection  with 
quotation  marks,  113;  rules  for  use 
of,  109-13;  to  be  omitted  after  abbre- 
viations for  linguistic  epochs,  no;  after 
headlines.  112;  after  initials  of  titles  of 
publications,  no;  after  MS  (= manu- 
script), no;  use  of,  after  abbreviations, 
no;  at  end  of  sentence,  109  (cf.  112). 

Period  leader,  defined,  224. 

Periodicals,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  37;  definite  article  not 
to  be  treated  as  part  of,  37;  name  of 
place  in  which  published  to  be  treated 
as  part  of,  37;   to  be  italicized,  52. 

Periods,  geological,  historical,  linguistic, 
and  literary,  capitalization  of  names  of, 
12. 

Personifications,  capitalization  of,  22. 

Philosophical  schools,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  7. 

Phrases:  adjectival,  use  of  comma  in  con- 
nection with,  138;  conjunctional,  etc., 
132. 

Pica,  explained,  233. 

Place  of  publication  and  publisher 's  name , 
use  of  colon  between,  122. 

Place-names,  foreign,  how  to  treat,  51. 

Plain  paragraph:  defined  and  illustrated, 
265;  indention  of,  255. 

Plate-proof,  defined,  268. 

Plays,  titles  of:  capitaHzation  of  principal 
words  in,  37;  to  be  italicized,  52. 

Plurals:  formation  of,  149;  of  abbrevia- 
tions in  literary  references,  how  formed, 
100;  of  nouns,  not  di\isible  if  singulars 
are  not,  211;  of  numerals,  formation 
of,  149. 

p.  M.  {post  meridiem):  spacing  of,  45,  202, 
250;  use  of  small  caps  for,  45. 

Poems:  capitalization  of  first  word  of  each 
line  in  English,  30;  of  first  word  of  each 
paragraph  in  Greek  and  Latin,  30; 
of  principal  words  in  titles  of,  37; 
titles  of  shorter,  to  be  roman-quoted, 
71  (cf.  52);  titles  of,  when  set  in  itaHcs 
and  when  in  roman,  52. 

Poetry       indention  of,   256;    quotations 


from,  when  to  reduce,  75;  when  to  run 
into  the  text,  75. 

Point  system,  explanation  of,  232,  233. 

PoHtical :  alliances,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  14;  divisions,  4,  5;  organizations,  9; 
parties,  7. 

"Pope,"  when  capitalized,  19. 

Position,  use  of  comma  before  "of"  in 
connection  with,  142. 

Possessive  case,  how  formed,  103,  148. 

"Post,"  compounds  with,  191. 

"Pre-,"  compounds  with,  187. 

Preface,  etc.,  quotation  marks  to  be  omit- 
ted with,  72. 

Prefix  or  suflix  not  complete  in  itself,  to 
be  indicated  by  hyphen,  195. 

Prefixes  "co-,"  "pre-,"  and  "re-,"  how 
to  treat,  187. 

Prepositions:  formation  of  nouns  of  pres- 
ent participles  in  connection  with,  169; 
to  be  lower-cased  in  titles,  37;  use  of 
comma  in  connection  with  clauses  end- 
ing in  different,  139. 

"President,"  when  capitahzed,  19,  42. 

Principal  words:  capitalization  of ,  in  titles 
of  pubHcations,  37;  definition  of,  37. 

Proceedings  (of  societies),  titles  of:  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in,  37;  to 
be  italicized,  52. 

Pronouns:  capitaHzation  of,  in  titles  of 
pubHcations,  37;  referring  to  Deity,  21. 

Pronunciation,  division  according  to 
(American  system),  204. 

Proofreaders:  hints  to,  pp.  99-102;  marks 
of,  p.  106. 

Proofs,  description  of,  266-70. 

Proper  names:  capitaHzation  of,  i;  how 
to  form  possessive  of,  103;  verbs  and 
adjectives  derived  from,  use  of  lower- 
case for,  46. 

Proper  nouns:  capitalization  of,  i,  3,  46; 
division  of ,  to  be  avoided,  201. 

Prose:  extracts,  when  to  reduce,  75; 
when  to  run  into  text,  75;  indention 
of  paragraphs  in,  255. 

Publications:  period  to  be  omitted  after 
initials  used  as  abbreviations  for,  no; 
titles  of,  capitaHzation  of  principal 
words  in,  37;  titles  of  subdivisions  of, 
when  to  be  roman-quoted,  72;  use  of 
italics  for,  52;  when  to  be  spelled  out, 
95- 


ii8 


The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


Punctuation:  of  extracts  from  modern 
authors,  102;   rules  for,  io8-g7. 

Punctuation  marks:  placing  of,  with  refer- 
ence to  indices  in  text,  214;  to  be 
printed  in  same  type  as  word  or  letter 
preceding  them,  108. 

"Pyramid,"  explained  and  illustrated, 
260. 

Quad,  defined,  239. 

Quadrat:  see  Quad. 

"Quarter,"  compounds  of,  180. 

4to,  8vo,  etc.,  not  to  be  treated  as  abbre- 
viations, no. 

"Quasi,"  compounds  with,  189. 

Query,  use  of  interrogation  point  for,  116. 

Question  mark:    see  Interrogation  point. 

Questions:  direct,  to  be  followed  by  inter- 
rogation point,  116;  indirect,  not  to 
be  followed  by  interrogation  point,  116. 

Quotation  marks:  not  to  be  used  in  con- 
nection with  reduced  citations,  77; 
placing  of  colon  in  connection  with, 
123;  of  comma,  146;  of  ellipsis,  165; 
of  exclamation  point,  115;  of  interro- 
gation point,  117;  of  period,  113;  rules 
for  use  of,  64-81;  to  be  omitted  in 
references  to  Preface,  Index,  etc.,  72; 
use  of  double  and  single,  81. 

Quotations,  how  to  treat,  64-81. 

"  Raihroad"  and  "  Railway,"  to  be  spelled 
out,  94. 

"Re-,"  compounds  with,  187. 

Reading-matter  in  columns  of  ruled 
tables,  how  to  set,  226. 

Recto,  defined,  264. 

Reductions:  rules  for,  75-77;  scale  of,  76. 

Reference  indices,  what  to  use  for,  214. 

References,  Uterary:  list  of  words  to  be 
abbreviated  in,  100  (cf.  33,  218);  use 
of  dash  in  connection  with,  158. 

"Reformer,"  when  capitalized,  23. 

Regiments,  capitalization  of  names  of,  11. 

Regions  or  parts  of  the  world,  capitali- 
zation of  names  of,  3. 

Regular  paragraph :  see  Plain  paragraph . 

Religious:  denominations,  capitalization 
of  names  of,  7;  organizations,  9. 

Residence,  use  of  comma  before  "of"  in 
connection  with,  142. 

Resolutions:      how    to    introduce    para. 


graphs  in,  35,  44, 62;  word  "Resolved" 
in,  how  to  set,  62;   word  "Whereas,' 
44- 
"Resolved,"  in  resolutions,  to  be  set  in 
italics,  62. 

Revise,  defined,  270. 

Rhymed  lines,  in  poetry,  indention  of, 
256. 

Roman  numerals:  at  beginning  of  Hues, 
spacing  of,  252;  in  headUnes,  spacing 
of,  252;   omission  of  period  after,  in. 

"Roman-quote,"  defined,  64,  234. 

Roman  type,  defined,  234. 

"Room,"  compounds  of,  170. 

Round  numbers,  definition  and  treatment 
of,  85. 

Ruled  tables:  box-heads  for,  222;  how 
to  set,  221;  reading-matter  in,  226; 
specimens  of,  231. 

Rules:  double,  use  of,  in  tables,  228; 
rules  for  use  of,  in  tables,  223. 

"Run  in,"  defined,  261. 

Running-heads:  defined,  264;  omission 
of  period  after,  112;  hint  for  setting  of, 
264. 

Run-overs,  avoidance  of,  247. 

Sacred  books,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  25. 

"Saint":  to  be  omitted  in  connection 
with  names  of  apostles,  church  fathers, 
etc.,  98;    when  abbreviated,  98. 

Salutatory  phrase  at  beginning  of  letters, 
rules  for  setting,  43. 

Schools,  philosophical,  hterary,  and  artis- 
tic, capitaHzation  of  names  of,  7. 

Scripture  passages:  names  of  books  of 
Bible  to  be  abbreviated  in,  99;  punctua- 
tion of,  121,  126;   spacing  of,  253. 

"Section,"  introducing  paragraphs  and 
followed  by  a  number,  use  of  cap  and 
small  caps  for,  44. 

Section  mark,  spacing  of,  250;  use  of, 
for  footnote  index,  214. 

Sects,  religious,  capitalization  of  names  of, 
7- 

"Self,"  compounds  of,  182. 

"Semi,"  compounds  with,  181. 

Semicolon:  illustration  of  use  of,  com- 
pared with  that  of  comma,  124;  placing 
of,  in  connection  with  quotation  marks, 
127;    rules  for  use  of,  124-27;   use  of, 


Manual  of  Style:    Index 


119 


in  enumerations,  125;  to  mark  division 
of  sentence,  124;  to  separate  passages 
in  Scripture  references  containing  chap- 
ters, 126. 

Sequences:  of  footnote  indices,  214;  of 
subdi\-isional  numberings,  160;  of  three 
or  more  hnks,  use  of  comma  before 
"and,"  "or,"  and  "nor"  in,  130. 

Serial  titles:    to  be  roman-quoted,  70. 

Series,  use  of  comma  before  final  "and," 
"or,"  and  "nor"  in,  130. 

Sermons,  titles  of,  to  be  roman-quoted,  72. 

Shank,  defined,  237. 

Shillings  and  pence,  how  to  treat  abbre- 
viations for,  60. 

Ships,  names  of,  to  be  roman-quoted,  73. 

"Shop,"  compounds  of,  170. 

"Short  and,"  definition  of,  Q7;  when 
used,  94,  97. 

Short  words:  avoidance  of  di\asions  of, 
199;    spacing  of,  249. 

Shoulder,  defined,  237. 

Side-heads:  defined,  261;  omission  of 
period  after,  112;  use  of  dash  in  con- 
nection with,  156;  use  of  lower-case 
in,  48  (cf.  156). 

Signatures  at  end  of  letters  or  articles: 
omission  of  comma  after,  145;  of  period, 
112;  rules  for  setting  of,  43,  55. 

"Sister,"  compounds  of,  174. 

Sizes  of  type,  in  ordinary  use,  samples 

of,  233. 
"Skin,"   compounds  of,    177. 
Slug,  defined,  259. 

Small  caps:  defined,  238;  how  indi- 
cated, 238;    use  of,  45. 

Small  pica,  explained,  233. 

Social  organizations,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  9. 

Soft  c  or  ^,  do  not  divide  on,  206. 

Solar  system,  capitalization  of  names  of 
bodies  in,  in  works  on  astronomy,  41. 

"SoUd,"  defined,  258. 

Spaces:  different  sizes  of,  explained,  239- 
44;  specimen  of  lines  spaced  with 
different  sizes  of,  244. 

Spacing:  of  a.m.,  b.  c,  etc.,  250;  of 
divisional  signs,  250;  of  figure  col- 
umns in  tables,  225;  of  formulae,  254; 
of  headlines,  252;  of  metric  symbols, 
250;  of  monetary  symbols,  251;  of 
numerals  at  beginning  of  paragraphs, 


252;  of  reading-matter  in  ruled  tables, 
226;  of  rules  in  tables,  223;  of  Scrip- 
ture passages,  253;  of  short  words,  249; 
rules  for,  239-54;  standard,  245;  what 
is  considered  good,  245;  with  different 
sizes  of  spaces,  samples  of,  244. 

Spanish  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  37. 

Species,  scientific  names  of:  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  40;   of  italics,  40. 

Specimen  tables,  231. 

Spelled  out,  words,  phrases,  and  titles 
which  are  to  be,  82-95. 

Spelling:  list  of  words  of  more  than  one, 
107;  of  ages,  89;  of  books  of  Bible,  99; 
of  centuries,  90;  of  Christian  names, 
83;  of  "Company"  and  "Brothers" 
in  names  of  firms,  97;  of  decades,  91; 
of  Egyptian  dynasties,  90;  of  extracts 
from  modern  authors,  102;  from  Old 
English,  102;  of  indefinite  article  before 
h,  u,  etc.,  104;  of  metric  symbols,  loi; 
of  names  of  months,  92;  of  names  of 
publications,  95;  of  names  of  regiments, 
90;  of  numbers  commencing  a  sentence, 
86;  of  numbers  of  less  than  three 
digits,  84;  of  possessives  of  proper 
names  ending  in  a  sibilant,  103;  of 
' '  Railroad  "  and  "  Railway , "  94 ;  of  round 
numbers,  85;  of  "Saint,"  98;  of  ses- 
sions of  Congress,  90;  of  states  and 
territories,  96;  of  sums  of  money,  87; 
of  time  of  day,  88;  of  titles,  82;  of 
"United  States,"  93;  of  words  denoting 
subsections,  in  literary  references,  100; 
rules  for,  82-107. 

Squares,  capitalization  of  names  of,  6. 

Standard:  of  measurement  in  typog- 
raphy, 233;  space  used  to  separate 
words,  242. 

"State,"  when  capitalized,  24  note. 

States  and  territories,  names  of:  list  of 
abbreviations  for,  96;  to  be  abbreviated 
when  following  those  of  towns,  96. 

Statistics,  treatment  of  numbers  in,  84. 

"Store,"  compounds  of,  172. 

Stub:  definition  of,  222;  head  for,  222. 

Styles  of  type,  234-38. 

"Sub,"  compounds  with,  191. 

Subdivisions:  in  literary  references,  use 
of  lower-case  for,  47  (cf.  100,  218); 
letters  used  to  indicate,  to  be  set  in 
italics,  56;  use  of  parentheses  in  con- 
nection with,  56;  of  publications,  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in  titles  of. 


I20  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


37;    titles  of,  to  be  roman-quoted,  or 
capitalized  without  quotation  marks,  72. 

Sufl&x  or  prefix,  indicated  by  hyphen,  195. 
"Sultan,"  when  capitaUzed,  19- 

Summarizing  clauses,  use  of  dashes  in 

connection  with,  154. 
"Super,"  compoimds  with,  191. 
Superior   figtires,   use    of,   for   reference 

indices,  214,  220. 
Superscriptions,  omission  of  period  after, 

112. 
"Supra,"  compounds  with,   192. 

Supreme  Being,  capitaUzation  of  names 
for,  and  pronouns  referring  to,  21. 

Swedish  titles  of  publications,  use  of 
capitals  in,  37. 

Syllabi,  scheme  of  notation  and  inden- 
tion of  subdi\isions  in,  160. 

Syllables,  hyphen  used  to  indicate,  196. 

Symbols:  chemical,  treatment  of,  no; 
metric,  spacing  of,  250;  treatment  of, 
loi,  no;    monetary,  spacing  of,  250. 

Tables:  headhnes  of,  how  to  set,  230; 
of  two  columns,  to  be  set  as  op)en,  229; 
of  more  than  two,  as  ruled,  229;  open, 
headlines  for  columns  in,  222;  open, 
how  to  set,  221;  rvded,  box-heads  for, 
222;  ruled,  how  to  set,  221;  rules  for 
setting  of,  221-31;  rules  for  use  of 
rules  in,  223;  specimen,  231;  to  be  set 
to  even  picas  or  nonpareils,  227. 

Tabular  work,  rules  for,  221-31  (see 
Tables). 

Technical:  terms,  explanation  of  typo- 
graphical, 232-75;  words  or  phrases, 
use  of  quotation  marks  for,  67. 

Thick  space,  defined,  242. 

Thin  space,  defined,  243. 

Thin-spacing,  where  to  avoid,  246. 

Thoroughfares:  capitaUzation  of  names 
of,  6;  numbers  forming  part  of  names 
of,  to  be  spelled  out,  90. 

Thousands,  use  of  comma  after  digits 
indicating,  143. 

Three-era  dash :  defined,  240;  illustrated, 
244. 

Three-em  quad,  defined,  240. 

Three-em  space,  defined,  242. 

Time:  indications,  how  to  punctuate,  121; 
of  day,  how  to  treat,  88. 


Titles:  civil  and  military,  capitalization 
of,  19;  honorary,  19;  in  direct  address, 
19;  of  nobility,  19;  preceding  names, 
to  be  spelled  out,  82;  list  of  exceptions, 
82;  "vice,"  "ex-,"  "elect,"  "general," 
and  "lieutenant,"  constituting  parts  of, 
how  to  treat,  185. 

Titles  of  publications:  capitalization  of 
principal  words  in,  37;  use  of  capitals 
in:  EngUsh,  Latin,  French,  ItaUan, 
Spanish,  Swedish,  German,  Danish, 
Dutch,  37;  use  of  itaUcs  for,  52;  of 
roman,  70,  71,  72;  to  be  correctly 
quoted,  102;  when  to  be  spelled  out, 
9S;  of  addresses,  72;  of  articles,  72; 
of  books,  52;  of  chapters,  72;  of  cycles 
of  poems,  52;  of  divisions  of  books, 
etc.,  72;  of  documents,  52;  of  essays, 
52;  of  lectures,  72;  of  newspapers,  52; 
of  pamphlets,  52;  of  papers,  72;  of 
periodicals,  52;  of  plays,  52;  of  poems, 
printed  in  separate  volume,  52;  of 
poems,  short,  71  (cf.  52);  of  proceed- 
ings of  societies,  52;  of  series,  70;  of 
tracts,  52;  of  transactions  of  societies, 
52;  of  treatises,  52. 

Toasts,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  37;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
72. 

"To  be  continued,"  at  end  of  articles, how 
to  set,  63. 

Town  and  state,  names  of,  in  date  line, 
how  to  set,  43. 

Tracts,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  37;  to  be  italicized,  52. 

Transactions  (of  societies),  titles  of:  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in,  37; 
to  be  itahcized,  52. 

Transition,  use  of  dash  to  indicate,  150. 

Translation:  of  names  of  foreign  institu- 
tions, 9;  of  foreign  words  or  phrases, 
68. 

Treaties,  capitalization  of  names  of,  16. 

Treatises,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  37;   to  be  italicized,  52. 

"Tri,"  compounds  with,  181. 

Trinity,  Christian,  capitalization  of  names 
of  members  of,  21. 

Two-column  tables,  to  be  set  as  open,  229. 
Two-em  dash:   defined,  240;  illustrated, 

244. 
Two-em  quad,  defined,  240. 

Two-letter  syllables,  avoidance  of,  in 
divisions,  199 


Manual  of  Style:    Index 


121 


Type:  different  parts  of  body  of,  ex- 
plained, 237;  names  for  different  sizes 
of,  233;   styles  of,  234-38. 

Typesetting  machines,  274,  275. 

Typographical  terms,  explanation  of, 
232-75. 

U,  long,  form  of  indefinite  article  before, 
104. 

"Ultra,"  compounds  with,  192. 

"Un-  "  compounds  with,  188. 

"Under,"  compoimds  with,  190. 

Unit,  typographical,  explained,  232. 

"United  States":  when  to  be  spelled  out, 
93;  when  to  be  abbreviated,  93. 

University  of  Chicago:  capitalization  of 
special  terms  dealing  with  organization, 
administration,  and  curricula  of,  42; 
of  titles  of  divisions,  departments,  offi- 
cers, and  courses  and  units  of  study,  in 
official  work  dealing  with,  42. 

Unusual  word  or  phrase,  use  of  quotation 
marks  for,  67. 

Verbs:    capitaUzation  of,  in  titles  of  pub- 

Ucations,    37;     derived     from     proper 

names,  how  to  treat,  46. 
Verse  or  page,  letter  affixed  to  number  of, 

to  denote  fractional  part:  to  be  set  in 

italic,  56;   spacing  of,  56. 


Versions  of  Bible:  abbreviations  for,  26; 
capitalization  of,  26. 

Verso,  defined,  264. 

"Vice,"  prefixed  to  titles,  how  to  treat,  185. 

"Vol.,"  "chap.,"  "p.,"  etc.,  in  literary 
references:  use  of  numerals  with,  218; 
when  omitted,  218. 

' '  Von  "  and  "  de , "  rule  for  treatment  of ,  83 . 

Vowel:  divide  on,  whenever  possible,  207; 
single,  forming  separate  syllable  in 
middle  of  word,  to  be  put  in  first  Hne 
in  di\iding,  207. 

Weights  and  measures  metric:  how  to 
designate,  loi;   spacing  of,  250. 

"Whereas,"  in  resolutions,  use  of  cap  and 
small  caps  for,  44. 

Wide  spacing,  where  to  avoid,  246. 

Word  or  phrase :  accompanied  by  its  defi- 
nition, to  be  quoted,  66;  to  which 
attention  is  directed,  use  of  quotation 
marks  for,  69. 

Words:  hyphenated,  list  of ,  197;  of  more 
than  one  spelling,  how  to  spell,  107. 

"Work,"  compounds  of,  170. 

"World,"  compovmds  of,  176. 

Zoological  terms:  use  of  capitals  in,  40; 
of  italics,  61. 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


MODERN  BODY  TYPE 

FIVE     POI  NT     NO.    67 

Wlien  thoughtful  flreeka  like  Polybius  biiw  the  full  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have 
felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  liistory.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts iu  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of 
one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alex- 
ander was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by 
his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  1)e  his  sole 
successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to 
THE  FROZEN  NORTH  AND  THE  TORRID  SOUTH  AS  ITS  NATURAL  LIMITS,  EXCHANGING  THE 
VIRGIN  ORES  or  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  1234567890 
But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had     1234567890 

SIX    POINT     NO.    57 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  con- 
quests in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 
The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the 
third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
WAS  HINDERED  BY  HIS  EARLY  DEATH,  MOST  OF  THE  EARLY 
Diadochi  had  each  foe  many  hakd-fought  years  1234567890 

sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate         1234567890 

AElOU  A^fotJ  AEtOtT  IfilOt  AEIOU  AElOlJ  AgS  ^^KSST 
lElou  AEf 6tr  AfiiOtJ  ktlot  aEIOC  aeIou  Aqn  aeiou  66l6u  &&if)u  aglOu  aeiOfl  aeI6u 
AElOU  A£:16jy  AtltOU  A£:t6ry  AElOU  AElOty  Cf^HH&T  hhsStz 
aeiuii  d^ldu  d,6ldu  dild'G,  dSlOil  aeidii  dfnD5    PI)  d  p  63  k^Q  h^iksStuz 


126  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


SEVEN     POINT     NO.    57 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by 
reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence 
of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his 
conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an 
empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant 
genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regen- 
erate the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Medi- 
terranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its 
natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought 
spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But 
while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed, 
who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpect- 
edly, by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of 
a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by 
such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect, 
coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever- widening 
frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Mace- 
donia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a 
century  might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most 

OF  THE  STOICS,  AN  OPTIMIST  OR  A  FATALIST.  THERE  WAS, 

NO  DOUBT,  THE  MANIFEST  GAIN  OF  A  GREAT  PEACE  THRO  1234567890 

of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitration       1234567890 
ACAE  AO  AMCti  hh\bt  ft6iOtl  fteldtt  ft^ft  dei&ii  dmn  U^XMl  dHdil  amoii  dffl 


sped  m  ens   o  j   Type  s  i  n   Use  127 

EIGHT     POI  NT     NO.     57 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car- 
thage and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was 
no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  vari- 
ance, or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by 
the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man, 
returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for 
the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what 
would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his 
early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete 
his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influ- 
ence of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain 
for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no 
very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it 
and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined 
THAT  IT  SHOULD  DROP  ALMOST  SUDDENLY,  UNEX- 
PECTEDLY, BY  THE  FORCE,  NOT  OP  GENIUS,  BUT  OP    1234:567890 

into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not    123  4567  8  90 

AEiOtJ  AEf 6u  Aei6i>  Ai5  AOto  6  AgN  qq  eEaoAq 

aeC  AEf6tJ  AEiotr  aJ;6u  aeiGu  aeiou  S  e  aelou  ^^loii  hh\b\i  aglOtl 
afeioa  &§en6  aeloii  d^idil  dHdii  dHOfl  deioU  dgn 


128  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

■■■■■■^■■■■■■■■■■■■■MHHHflHBBHIMHHBiBMBHBHMHHHBIHHIHIBBHHIH^BBMBHHHHHl^BBiHBBMV 

NINE    POI  NT     NO.    57 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  tm-ning-points  in  the  world's  history. 
There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations 
hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions 
would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influ 
ence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 
Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  diffi- 
cult matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  centiu'y,  fi-esh  from  her 
Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of 
the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most 
of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
ASPIRED  TO  BE  HIS  SOLE  SUCCESSOR,  HOPING 

TO  COMPLETE  HIS  WORK  AND  REGENERATE  THE  1234567890 

by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  cultu     1234  567  8  9  0 

AEIOU   A^iCU   AEtot  llSlOt  Al^lOt)   AElOt  AgN 

AElotJ   AEf6i5    AfeiotJ    AfefoO    AElot)    Aeiou   aqS 

aeiou   d^ioti   aM5u   aSiofi   aeioii   aeiou   kgn 

AElOtj  aM6u  lEidu  AMdtf  Amoty  AMOtj  Ag^ 

delou   dH6ii   d,^\bfi   deiou   de'iOu    aeiou    dgn 
CHSIKSSSTZZ    accghhiiknoo6ssstuuuyyzz 
HffiTdSehhitrssiuz     B  b  d     P  p  p    05 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  129 


ELEVEN     rorNT     NO.    65 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all 
the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 
by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  sys- 
tem of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
ALL  THE  RESOURCES  OF  ASIA  UNDER  HIS 
HAND.  The  successes  of  Pykrhus,  1234567890 
army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  12  3  4  567890 
AEIOU  AElOt  AEIOtJ  AfilOC   AfilOt)  AElOt 

AEIOU     Ae16u     AeIOU     AEiot     AElOtJ     AEIOtr     1  g  N 

aeiou     d6i6ii    ^6i6ii     aeiCti     aeioti     a^iou     k  q  n 

AEIOD  A£lOiy  AiJtdtJ  A£:16&  AMOV  AmOtJ 

aeidil    d6i6iX    a^ibii    clilOtl    deioil    deiou    a  q  fi 
aqb)bcde^^^hUiikltiii^9f>PPqk 

qq4qr^ssti;?uz^^ 

lg:5agK!?sgT   AgkifS^^T  hbissttiz 

DS      Pp      0o      53^^co      dp      dqct^Sedf^^fuuif 


130  The   University  of  Chicago   Press 


OLD  STYLE  BODY  TYPE 

FIVE    POINT     NO.    83 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of 
one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexan- 
der was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difiicult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by 
his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his 
sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent 
influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the 
FROZEN  NORTH  AND  THE  TORRID  SOUTH  AS  ITS  NATURAL  LIMITS,  EXCHAN- 
GING THE  VIRGIN  ORBS  OF  SPAIN  FOR  THE  LONG-SOUGHT  SPICES  OF  1234567890 
Araby  the  hiest,  was  there/ore  710  very  wild  unagination.    But  7uhile  those           1 2J 4S 67 8go 


SIX     PCI  NT     NO       8 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they 
must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history. 
There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system 
of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men 
must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difiicult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of 
Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult 
Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have 
been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hin- 
dered by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  WORLD-EMPIRE,  INCLUDING  ALL  THE  LANDS  AND  NATIONS  ABOUT 
THE  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  1234567890 
torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the    virgin       i  23 4S(>t 8qo 

5r    Q    XoiJ    E    £    E    E     aioU    aeiou    aeibu    aeidu     ii    g 
O     C    aeidii     dt'ioTi    aei\     e     deiou     q 


spec  i  m  ens  o  j   Types   i  n   Use  J3 1 

SEVEN     POI  NT     NO.    B 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the 
world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests 
in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike 
that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  mat- 
ter to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes 
of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century, 
fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and 
feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hin- 
dered by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and 
regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterra- 
nean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural 
limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby 
the  blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had 
conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined 
that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius, 
but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the 
directions  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for 
Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  gu'\se 
of  securing  ever- widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid 
strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics, 
an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great 
peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitra- 

ENLIGHTENMENT.     THESE  MATERIAL  GAINS  WERE  INDISPUT- 
ABLE,   EVEN   THOUGH    A    DANGEROUS    MONOPOLY   WAS         1234567890 
dein^  established  not  merely  through  the  enormous  advan        1 23 456^ 8 go 
Q     f5     aeioii     aeiou     aeiou     aeioii     aeiQii     aeioii     9     n 
^    fj     aeioii     aeid/i     aeioii     deioii     aeioii     iiiioit    f    n 


132  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


EIGHT    POINT     NO.    8 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant 
genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regen- 
erate the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Med- 
iterranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its 
natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought 
spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But 
while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed, 
who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unex- 
pectedly, by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands 
of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by 
SUCH  NATIONAL  QUALITIES  AS  HAD  GAINED  FOR  SPARTA 

PRECEDENCE  AND  RESPECT,  COUPLED  WITH  AGGRES-  I234S6789O 

sive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever -widening       1 23  45  6y  8qo 
AEIOU   AEIoU   AtlJ   AE   AEiOU  A  g  I^  §    aeiou   ktXot   kkbt 

AE  AEiou  X  9  N  aeiou  aeiou  khibh  A6\6\x  aeiou  a9nafh60D«pt> 
A/0  AEldtj  AkU  E  AEIOU  AgN$  deioic  AHdil  aiu  dk  deloii  dchl 


sped  m  e  n  s   o  j   T  y  p  e  s  in  U  s  e  133 


NINE     POI  NT     NO.     8 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of 
the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  gov- 
ernment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the 
predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man, 
returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for 
the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what 
would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his 
early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete 
his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent 
influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
THAT  IT  SHOULD  DROP  ALMOST  SUDDENLY,  UNEX- 
PECTEDLY, BY  THE  FORCE,  NOT  OF  GENIUS,  I23456789O 
but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people      i  2j  4^  67  8  g  o 

AEiOtJ  AEIOU  AEU  AE  AEIOU  a  C  N  S  0 

AEioiJ  ktiot  AEU  e6  A9 

aeioii  aeiou  aeou  deiou  aci5u   ^a9n6tljhkmsg0 

Ai'dU  AEIU  AE  U  AEIOU  A  C  N 

> 

aeioii  detoil  am  deidu  deiofi  doii   s  i^    h  p  D  '5 


134  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


TEN     POrNT     NO.    8 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory. There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a 
young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East, 
men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not 
unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the 
resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would 
have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic. 
And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hin- 
dered by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had 

A    WORLD-EMPIRE,     INCLUDING     ALL     THE 

LANDS  AND  NATIONS    ABOUT    THE    MeDI-  I23456789O 

terranean    Sea,    reaching   to   the   frozen       j  2j  4^  67  8  g  o 

AEIOUAiotTEUE  AElOUgNg  AEioiJAEidtrEijEOAEiou 

A 9 N  aeiou  a^iou  adiou  a^ioii  aeloii  aacpnhnirssY 

AEIOU  AEldt/  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  A  E  ^  JSf  ^ 
aeiou  dewu  aeibit  deibu  deloii  d  f  H s ce ^  iu dh 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  135 


ELEVEN     POINT     NO.    8 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in 
the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population, 
in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now 
be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence 
of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  com- 
mon language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander 
was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in 
the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difificult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his 
hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from 
AND    IF   THE    REALIZATION    OF  THE   CON- 

QUEROR's  DREAMS  WAS  HINDERED  BY  I23456789O 

his  early  death,    most  of  the   early       i2j4^6'/8go 

Aeiou  AeIOO  Aeij  t  AEIOU  A  g  N  S 

AEIOU    AfeioU    AeIOU    AEIOIJ    AElOU    A  g  N 

aeioii  aeiOu  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  afio  hkrnsy  du  a  9 

Aeiou  A&I60  aeu  ^  aeiou  AgN 

aeioii  detovt  dh\  dHou  aeiou  da  ^H  0 


136  The   University  of  Chicago   Press 


TWELVE    POINT     NO.    8 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence 
of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a 
common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  pros- 
pect had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When 
Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike 
that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexan- 
TURY,    FRESH    FROM    HER    SAMNITE 

CONQUESTS,  SHOW  WHAT  WOULD       I23456789O 

/lave  been  the  successes  of  Alex     i  2  ^  4  5(>"j  8  go 

Aeiou  Afilou  fell  E  AgN 

AEiou  AfitoO  tiJ  £  AC N  aeiou  aeiou  aeu  aei6u  ^(pn 

AEIOO  Aj^ioO  A^u  £  gjv 

deioii    dHdu   aeu   dH6u  f  n 


specimens   oj   Types  in   Use  137 


FOURTEEN     POINT     NO.     8 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius 
saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth, 
they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto 
at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand 
prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man, 
FOR  THE  CONQUEST  OF  THE 
West  would  have  been  1234567890 
no  difficult  matter  to  Alex   i2j436j8go 

AEiou  Aeiou  Aeu  e  a  0  N 

AEIOU  Al&iOt  AEU  ^  A  C  N 

aeiou  aeiou  aeu  aeiou  aon  ago 
0    6   A   a   doii   aeu   du   den 


138  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


EIGHTEEN     POINT     NO.    8 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly- 
bius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now 
be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law, 
by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

GRAND     PROSPECT     HAD 

BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  1234567890 

the  world.    When  A 1 1 2^45678(^0 
AEOO  Afi6u  feO  6  A  N 


specimens  oj   Types   in   Use  139 


MONOTYPE  TYPE 

SIX     POI  NT     NO.     3  1 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth, 
they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory. There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language, 
in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East, 
men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the 
conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  diflicult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the 
resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would 
have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate 
the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging 
the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no 
wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously 
had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly, 
by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained 
it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained 
for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of 
securing  ever  widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's 
Macedonia  ? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century  might 
indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics,  an  optimist  or 
a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great  peace  throughout  the 
world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitration  of  an  umpire  with  power  to 
enforce  his  will;  there  was  the  consequent  development  of  wide  commerce,  with  its 
diffusion,  not  only  of  wealth,  but  of  enlightenment.  These  material  gains  were  indis- 
putable, even  though  a  dangerous  monopoly  was  being  established,  not  merely  through 
the  enormous  advantages  inseparable  from  Roman  influence,  but  by  the  jealous  de- 
struction of  all  those  commercial  centers  which  might  have  rivaled  Rome  by  reason 

RULERS  HAD  RECEIVED  ANY  EDUCATION  TO  FIT  THEM  FOR  AN  IM- 
PERIAL POLICY.  Administrative  ability  there  was  in  plenty,  1234567890 
just  as  there  had  been  tactical  knowledge  to  win  battles  without  any      12J4S678QO 

AEiotJ       AEi6i5       Afeioir       kttbt       aeiou       a£I6&       C  n  C 
aeI5u         aeiou         aeiou         aeioft         aSi6u         aeioii         ffi 
aeidii         deidii         (ieidit         dewH         aeioii         ieldii         f  n 


T40  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


EIGHT    POINT    NO.    31 


Wlien  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language, 
in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  is  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of 
Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite 
conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler 
repubhc.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his 
work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South 
as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long- 
sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination. 
But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had 
failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly, 
UNEXPECTEDLY,  BY  THE  FORCE,  NOT  OF  GENIUS,  BUT 

OF  CIKCUMSTANCES,  INTO  THE  HANDS  OF    A    PEOPLE  I23456789O 

who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander        12J4J678QO 

AEiou  AEi6u  AEibtr  Attot  AEiou  A£i6t^ 

aeiou  aeiou  abiou  aeioti  aeioii  3,eI6ii 

deiou  aeiou  aeiou,  deioH  aeioii  deioH 

TDK  HH^  S§  dkhhfy  Ss  f»f 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  141 


NINE    POI  NT     NO.    3  1 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one 
of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the 
predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  is  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  re- 
turning from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anti- 
cipated, as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for 
the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what 
would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his 
early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete 
his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence 
of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  torrid  South 
as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the 

IMAGINATION.      BUT  WHILE  THOSE  THAT  HAD  CON- 
CEIVED IT  AND   STRIVEN  FOR  IT  CONSCIOUSLY  123456789O 

had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  12^4^628^0 

AEiotJ      aIiou      AEibtr      Xtiot      aeiou  A£I5tj    g  n 

aeiou        aeiou        aeioii        aeiou        aeioii  S.6i6u      g  h 

deidu        deidu        aeloii        aeioii        deidil  dBdii        Q  nQ 


142  The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 


TEN     POINT    NO.    31 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car- 
thage and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto 
at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in 
population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence 
of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  is  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unHke  that  of 
Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  diffi- 
cult matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her 
Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  great  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  repubUc.  And  if  the  reahzation  of 
the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most 
of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
AND  REGENERATE  THE  DISTRACTED  WORLD  BY 

THE  POTENT   INFLUENCE   OF   HELLENISTIC  123456789O 

culture.    A  world-empire,  including  all  the        1234567890 

AEiotJ    ktiot    aM5u    Attou  aeiou    M16t  g  n 

aeioQ      aeiou      aeiou      aeiou  aeioii      a,gT6u  9 

deioU      aeiou      hHou      detoH  aeiou      deidU  f  n 

TQDKHHH^S  dkhhW 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  143 


ELEVEN     POINT     NO.     31 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in 
language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law, 
by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  is  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unHke  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all 
the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of 
Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of 
the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show 
what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his 
giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and 
feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's 
DREAMS    WAS    HINDERED     BY     HIS     EARLY 

DEATH,  MOST  OF  THE  EARLY  DiADOCHI         1234567890 

had  each  for  many  hard-jought  years      i2j4j6y8go 

AEIOU    AEIOU    AEIOU    AEiot^    AEIOtJ    AEIOU    fNf 

aeiou     a^ioii     aeiou     aeioii     aeiou     aSiou     9 
deidii    aeiou    aeiou    detoH     d'etdii     aeiou      Q  n  Q 


144  The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 


TWELVE    POINT     NO.    31 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  of 
the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or 
at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  popula- 
tion, in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  in- 
fluence of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander 
was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests 
in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the 
conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult 
matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his 
small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  cen- 
tury, fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what 

HIS   GIANT    GENIUS    AND    ARMAMENTS, 

AGAINST  THE  YOUNGER  AND  FEEBLER    1234567890 

republic .  A nd  ij  the  realization  oj  the  1 2j^^6y8go 


^     ^t.*:^  •'*•"**   '^  AAAAA  VVVVV  ^    ^    ^    ^ 


—  —  WW 


Aou    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    aeou    mm    5 
dkhh  h^st       d'eldil    detou    del       deio  del    et 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  i45 


LINOTYPE    TYPE 

Ere  H  T     POI  NT     NO.      I 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one 
of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  vari- 
ance, or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by 
the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man, 
returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for 
the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what 
would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his 
early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete 
his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influ- 
ence of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain 
for    the    long-sought    spices    of    Araby    the    blest,    was    therefore    no 

THAT    IT    SHOULD     DROP    ALMOST     SUDDENLY,    Unex- 
pectedly,   BY    THE    FORCE,    NOT    OF    GENIUS,    BUT    OF    I23456789O 
circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  at-   1234567890 
£fi  AEOU  AEOU  AE'iou  AEiou  c  gfi  acio  aeiou  aeioii  aeiou 
££  deio  aeloii  de'idil  aeiou  gii 


146  The   University  0  j  Chicago  Press 

NINE    POINT    NO.     I 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history. 
There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hither- 
to at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in 
population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of 
one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome ; 
for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter 
to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 
The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult 
Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with 
his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler 
republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had 
each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor, 
hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world 
by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain 

FOR    THE    LONG-SOUGHT    SPICES    OF    ARABY    THE 

BLEST^  WAS  THEREFORE  NO  VERY  WILD  IMAGINATION.   I23456789O 

But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  1234567890 

£fi  AEOU  AEOU  AEiou  aeIou  g  Qn  aeio  aeioti  aeiou  aeioii 

E^  deio  deidu  d'eidii  deiou  gn 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  147 


TEN      FOI  NT      NO. 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in 
language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law, 
by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all 
the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of 
Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of 
the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show 
what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with 
his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and 
feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's 
dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the 
early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  as- 
pired to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his 
WORK  AND  REGENERATE  THE  DISTRACTED 

WORLD   BY    THE    POTENT    INFLUENCE    OF    I23456789O 

A   ivorld-empire,   including  all   the   1^3436/8^0 
££  AEOU  AEOU  AEioiJ  AEiou  g  qh  aeio  aeiou  aeioii  aeiou 
£^  deio  deidii  d'eidii  deioii  gn 


148  The   University  0  j  Chicago   Press 


ELEVEN     POINT     NO.     I 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that 
all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war, 
distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  gov- 
ernment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  di- 
rected by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was 
yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the 
far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an 
empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of 
the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alex- 
ander, with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 
The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her 
Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the 
successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  ar- 
maments, against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic. 
AND  IF  THE  REALIZATION  OF  THE  CON- 
queror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  1234567890 
his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  1 2 ^ 4 ^6'/ 8 ^o 
fifi  AEOU  AEou  aeiou  aeiou  q  Qn  aeio  aeiou  aeioii  aeiou 
&R  aeio  aeidit  aeioii  aewu  gn 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  149 


CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT    POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had,  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  popula- 
tion, in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will 
of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a 
common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the 
world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in 
the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that 
of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  succe3«es  of 
Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alex- 
ander, with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  repub- 
lic. And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to 
be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits, 
exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest, 
was  therefore  no  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and 
striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop 
almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances, 
into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander, 
Jbut  by  such  national  qualities  at  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect, 
coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers, 
such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed   this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 

MIGHT  INDEED  FEEL  UNEASY  AT  THE  RESULT,  IF  HE  WERE 

NOT,    LIKE   MOST   OF  THE   StOICS,    AN   OPTIMIST   OR   A    FATALIST.        I23456789O 

There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great  peace  througbont     /  2J^j6j8go 


150  The   University  0}  Chicago  Press 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

TEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world* s  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of 
one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing fi-om  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander, 
with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of 
Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have 
been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  arma- 
ments, against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  reali- 
zation of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death, 
most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  as- 
pired to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and 
regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
AND  IF  THE  REALIZATION  OF  THE  CONQUEROR 

DREAMS  WAS   HINDERED  BY  THE  POTENT  INFLUENCE  I   23456789O 

^  world-empire y   171  eluding  all   the   nations   and  I2J 4^ 678(^0 


specimens  oj  Types  in  Use  151 


TWELVE    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the 
fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  vari- 
ance, or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in 
population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander 
was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests 
in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the 
conquests  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult 
matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with 
his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show 
what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
with  his    giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 

AND    IF    THE   REALIZATION  OF   THE 

conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  1234567890 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  1 2  j^^ 6j8 go 


152  T' h  e   University  of  Chicago  Press 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

FOURTEEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by 
the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand 
prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men 
must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of 
the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter 

AND  IF  THE  REALIZATION  OF  THE 

conqueror's  dreams  was  hin  I  2  34567890 
bis  early  death,  most  of  the  early  l2J4^6'/8go 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  153 

PORSON  GREEK 

SIX    POINT 

TaSe  5e  /aot  Trai'Tw?,  e</)vj,  Kpoiae,  Ae'fof  ttws  aTro/Se'/SrjKe  Ta  e/c  tow  «i'  AeA(/)oif  XP'?" 
arrjpiov  aol  yap  6rj  Aeyerat  navv  ye  TfOepanevaOai,  6  'AttoAAwj'  Kai  (re  jraj'Ta  eKC(V<i> 
Tr€i06fJiei>of  irpamiv,  'E/3ovA6(u,tj»»  af ,  Jt  KOpe,  ovtws  exeii'  •  vui*  6e  itavTa  Tavavria. 
evdi/i  e^  oipxv^  nparroiv  npQcry]vix^W  '^V  'AiroAAwj't.  n«tis  fie;  ec^rj  6  KOpo;  •  &iSaaKe  • 
iravv  ydp  napdSo^a  Ae'yei?,  'On  npuiTov  fxev,  €(^tj,  a/aeA77<ra9  epwrai'  toi'  ^eoi'  ei  ti  eSeo- 
jiATji',  aTreTreipw/u.'r)!'  avToO  ei  SxjvaiTO  a\r}diveiv. 

EIGHT    POINT 

TdSe  5^  /AOi  Trdvrw?,  e(f>7},  Kpoice^  \^^ov  ttcDs  diro^i^rjKe  to.  iK  tov  iv 
A€\(pois  xPV<^''"'1P''0^ '  '^ol  yap  8t}  Xiyerai  xdvv  ye  TedepaireOadai.  6  'A7r6X\a>i' 
KaL  ae  iravra  ^/cei'vy  iTei.d6iievov  Tpdrreiu.  'E^ov\6fir)v  iv,  c5  KOpe,  oI/tws 
€Xf'  ■  ''I'*'  5^  Trdvra  rdvavria  €vdi>s  i^  dpxv^  irpdrruv  irpocrrivix^V''  '^V 
'ATriXXwvt.     IltDs  5^;  ^(pr]  6  Kvpos  •   5i5a<7Ke  •  irdw  yap  irapddo^a  'K4y€t.s. 

TEN     POI  NT 

TaSt  8c  fxoL  TravTws,  €<^>7,  Kpoitre,  Xc^ov  ttws   aTro^€J3r]K€  to.   Ik 

TOV  iv  AeA^ots  ^^prjarypiov'    (tol  yap  Srj  Xeyerat  ttovv  ye  reOepa- 

Trev(T$aL   6    AttoAXwv   Kai    ae    irdvTa    eKeivu)    TreLdo/xevov    irpaTTCLV. 

HjpovAofXYjv  av,  Q)  r^vpe,  ovtws  ^X^^^  *    ^^^  "^  iravTa  ravavTca  ei^t/v? 

€$  a.p-)(rj<;  trparroiv  Trpo(r7jvi)($r]V  tw  'A7rdA\<ovt.      IlaJs  Se;    l^ry  6 

ELEVEN     POINT 

TaSe  Be  /JLOL  Traz/ro)?,  ec^?;,  K/30tcre,  Xe^ov  7roj<;  airoffe/SijKe 
TOL  eK  TOV  iv  Ae\(f)ol<i  ')(^pr](TT7]piov '  aol  yap  8r)  XeyeTat  irdvv 
ye  TeOepairevaOaL  6  ^ KttoWcov  Kai  ae  irdvTa  eKeivo)  TreiOo- 
ixevov  TrpciTTetv.     *l^ffov\6/jLr)v  dv^  &  KO/oe,  ovro)?  ey^eiv  vvv 

TWELVE     POINT 

TaSe  he  [xol  iravTco^;,  e(\)y)^  Kpolcre,  \4^ov  ttcj?  oltto- 
/Be^rjKe  ra  iK  tov  iv  AeXc^oi?  xprjcrTrjpLov  aol  yap 
Srj  Xeyerat  rrapv  ye  TedepairevaOai  6  ^ AttoWojv  Kai 
ere  TrdvTa  iKetvcp  TreiOopievov  irpaTTeiv.      'FA/BovXofxrjv 


154  The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 

ANTIQUE  GREEK 

EIGHT    POINT 

Td8£  8^  fioi  irdvTws,  e*})!!,  Kpoicrc,  Xe'lov  irdis  diroPePTjKC  rd  Ik  tov 
Iv  A€|i4>ots  xpT]<rTTipiou'  o-ol  "ydp  St]  \€"y€Tai  irdvv  76  rcGepaircvo-Oai  6 
'AiroWwv  Ka(  <r€  irdvTa  IkcCvo)  irei06p.£vov  irpdrretv.  'EPovXoifqv  dv,  w 
Kvpe,  ovTws  c'xciv  vvv  8c  irdvTa  rdvavria  cvOvs  l|  dpx^js  irpdrrttv  irpoo-- 
T)V€x9i]v  T«  'AiroXXwvt.     Iltiis  Se'l    'i^y\  6  Kvpos  •    8C8a(rK€'  irdw  -ydp 

ELEVEN     POINT 

Td8€  hi  |xoi  irdVTcDS,  €(|)T|,  KpoLo-€,  X€|ov  irws  diropepiiK€ 
TcL  €K  TOV  €V  A€\<j>OLS  xP'H^'^'HP^oi)  •  aol  •ydp  8t|  Xc^ycTai 
Trdvu  ^e  T€0€paTr€{lo'0ai  6  *  AttoXXwv  Kai  cc  Trdvra  €K€iv(o 
ireiSoiJLevov  irpdrTciv.     'EpovX6(XT|v  dv,  S  K-upe,  outcos 

INSCRIPTION  GREEK 


TEN     POINT 


PH^ANTA'^Yr^PA<t>YAAEAOTA 
TTAN^Ai<^^YPA4>YAAINTA 
TAMie¥^ANTAAEKATT<t>TEYiANTA^l, 
QPAMMATEY^ANTAKAITHC4>1A0^EBA^T0Y 

HEBREW 

SIX    POINT 

rnnV  no^w"^  n-QDn  nrnb  :  bi^nici  trbia  TiTp  nb'bc  ^^bt?^ 

I^Ti  AT  jt:t  -j-t  i-t«"Iv»  k  t      1  v  J         s  •■:•» 

nnb    tD'^nm^  mitti^  pis  bsicn  no^'a  nnpb    :nrn  -"-iia^ 
iiDi  npb  aoi'^n  ddh  y^iij""  :  nisTia^  nr^  i::7bb  nianr  D'^^nsb 

f    J  r^AV  •••      J    J  T    TV  J-      J     •  IT  •     1  -   J-  --«  AT      t  T  J"  T      I    • 

NINE      POI  NT 

nc^^j^  rrcar\  n^^ib  :  b^nic^  'nV'ri  ii'n-p  ra'b-i  ^biii^j 

AT  jT  :   T  •"_i~T  I"  T   :    •       Iv  V         A*  T     I V  -J        :         ••    :    ■<- 

mw2^  mi  bsisn  ^&)2  rrnpb    :nrn  ^17J5<  rinb 
:?7^^^  :  n^aT^a^  to^  "i3?bb'  n^a-i3>  D^i^nsb  nnb  :  D"nir"7j!i 


AT      :  T  _>•  T    :    •  J"T  !•    T     I" 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  155 

NESTORIAN  SYRIAC 

NINE    POI  NT 

p"J^^577  P»  f  ...  7 

I *.JD9Q.a£    '111      sk    *^    i^Jg^    lll-^    V^r^O    >3^9^.i*^    ^  >n^w»9    (.^oLo 

ARABIC 


NINE    POI  NT 


L:Lir  ^y  ^^  ULT  Jc^^  --^  ^.JU!  JU  dU jJ^  JUJI 

Jjuo   ^   JouJl   CoU   iJU-wio   2oL^    J>«l    jVo    Uoj.   iUx«-o 

ETHIOPIC 


NINE    POI  NT 


156  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

MISCELLANEOUS  SIGNS 

SIX    POINT 

EIGHT    POI  NT 

-H ^XzbO©A<n:::^±^±i/f-'-°"'/#^?^"^^ 

NINE    POI  NT 

-  +  -  -^x  <  ±  ±  =  :  ::-H-/<"Il'''".''?nAi/f 

TEN     POINT 

^^"//  II  I 


ELEVEN     POINT 


FIVE    POINT  SEVEN     POINT  TWELVE    POINT 

-    =    +  =      +     --i-X*''"#  o/ff^CDfl 

f  f  f  f     V  V   x/  xl 


S  p  e  cim  en  s  0  j   T  y  p  e  s  i  n   U  s  e  157 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHTEEN     POI  NT 

When   thoughtful  Greeks   like    1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME   THAT  THE 


TWENTY-TWO    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gr  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


TH I RTY   POI  NT 


When  thoughtful  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY-SIX     POINT 


When  thoug  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIM 


1 58  The   University  o j  Chicago  Press 


CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 

When  th  1906 

THEFIRST 


CASLON  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 


EIGHTEEN     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Pol  I  go  6 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE 


TWENTY-TWO     POINT 


JVhen  thoughtful  Greeks  lik  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  igo6 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 


THIRTY     POINT 


JVHEN  thoughtful  igo6 


S  p  e  c  im  e  n  s   0  j   T  y  p  e  s   in   U  s  e  159 

OLD  STYLE  NO.  8 

TWENTY-TWO    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Gre  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


When  thoughtfu  iqo6 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-TWO   POINT 


When  thoug  1906 


THE  FIRST  TIM 


FORTY-FOUR    POINT 


Whenth  190 
THE  FIRST 


i6o  The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 

OLD  STYLE  NO,  8  ITALIC 

TWENTY-TWO   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Gr  igo6 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


When  thoughtful  iqo6 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-TWO    POINT 


When  thou  igo6 
THE  FIRS  T  T 


FORTY-FOUR   POINT 


When  tho  ig  o 

THE  FIRST 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  i6i 


CENTURY  EXPANDED 

SIX     POI  NT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HEL  1906 

EIGHT    POINT 

THE  FIRST   TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  1906 

TEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS  1906 

ELEVEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  1906 

TWELVE    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAN  1906 

FOURTEEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  1906 


EIGHTEEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  1906 


TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  1906 


THIRTY     POINT 


THE  FIRST  TI 190 


i62  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


FRENCH   OLD  STYLE 

SIX     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Gorlnth,  1906 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH 

SEVEN     POINT 

WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  FALL  OF  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

EIGHT    POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Cartha  1906 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  polybius  saw  the  fallo 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 

TEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  1906 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  H 

TWELVE    POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly  1906 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 

FOURTEEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  OR  1906 

SIXTEEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  1906 

TWENTY    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIMET  1906 

TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIM  1906 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  163 


THI RTY    POI  NT 


THE  FIRST    1906 


THIRTY-SIX     POINT 


THE  FIRST  190 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


THgFI906 


SIXTY    POINT 


THR  906 


CONDENSED  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  IQ06 

NINE    POI  NT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  1906 

TEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS  1906 

TWELVE    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA  1906 

SIXTEEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  190 


i64  The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 


CONDENSED  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T  1906 


TWENTY    POI  NT 


THEFIRSTT1METH1906 


TWENTY-TWO     POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  T  1906 


TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIM  1906 


TWENTY-EIGHT    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TI  1906 


THIRTY-TWO    POINT 


THE  FIRST  1906 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


THE  FIRS  1906 


FORTY    POINT 


THE  FIR  1906 


specimens  oj   Types  in  Use  165 

SIX    POI  NT 

93t)rn  tl|iiu9l;tful  (^xg^ka  Uki  Palybiua  sam  tl|r  fall  of  ([lartliaQr  and  of  QJart  1906 

EIGHT    POI  NT 

Wiifn  tifaugjtittid  O&rrrks  lik?  p^lgbtuB  Bam  tt;e  fall  of  (darttiag^  190G 

TEN     POINT 

HJlpn  tlinuglytful  (BrttkB  i\kt  fni^bim  aafo  tl|0  fall  1005 

TWELVE    POI  NT 

Wiim  tljnugljtful  (Sr^^ka  lik^  JPnlgbitm  mm  1300 

FOURTEEN     POI  NT 

Wifm  tlinugljtful  (Smka  Itk^  JPnlijbtuH  1900 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

m\^m  tljo«9l|tf«l  d^mks  ixkt  190H 


TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 


m\^m  tl|0«9l|tfttl  ®r  1000 


THI RTY    POI  NT 


If^n  tlj0«gljtf«l  lanfi 


THIRTY-SIX     POINT 


Ijptt  tl|a«9  19nfi 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


hm  th  1 900 


i66  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


|3rtarp  €tj:t 

EIGHT    POINT 

Whtn  tt)Ouabtful  <!5recfe?  \ihe  pai^hiu^  jsato  tbe  faH  of  Cartftage  leoe 


TEN     POINT 

Whtn  t6ati2:f)tfttl  (Sxtt'ks  like  polpbiug  0atD  tje  fall  of  1906 


TWELVE    POINT 


Wf)tn  tliou2|)tful  €ireebfl(  like  |0ol^biu0  siatD  tlie  1906 


FOURTEEN     POINT 


^^ett  ti^oug^tful  (KteefejS  Kfee  i^olt  looe 


EIGHTEEN     POINT 


l^ljen  t|)oug|)tful  (§xttkslik  1906 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


l^ljen  tj)0U5l)tful  (8m  1906 


THl  RTY   POI  NT 


W^m  tj)0ugj)tful  1906 


THl  RTY-SIX    POI  NT 


W))m  tI)ougl)  1906 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  167 

I^u^ot  Black 

SIX    POI  NT 

Wben  tboudbtful  <3tcek9  Ukc  pol^btus  saw  tbc  fall  of  dartba^e  and  of  Cod  1906 

EIC  HT     POI  NT 

Wiben  tbouflbtful  (5rceft0  lihe  pol^blus  saw  tbc  tall  ot  1906 

TEN     POINT 

TlClben  tbouabttul  Greel^s  like  pol^blus  sa  1906 

TWELVE    POINT 

Mben  tbougbtful  (Brcehs  Ifhe  pol?  1906 

EIGHTEEN     POI  NT 

Mben  tbougbtful  (3reeh8  X906 


TWENTY     POINT 


Mben  tbougbtful  (5 1906 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


lUaben  tbou  1906 


Bradley  Ccxt 

TEN     POINT 

mben  tDoudDtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  tbe  fall  of  wo6 

TWELVE    POINT 

mben  tbougbtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  $m  tbe  1906 


EIGHTEEN     POINT 


(Uben  tboudbtful  Greeks  like  Poly  \m 


i68  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


Braaiey  Cext 

TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 

OiiKU  tbouabtfnl  6mk  m 


TOURAINE  OLD  STYLE 

SIX     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Covin  igo6 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPEC7  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carth  igo6 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD 

TEN     POINT 

When  ihouglitful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  tl^e  I  go  6 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  igo6 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  P 


EIGHTEEN     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  igo6 


TWENTY -FOUR    POINT 


Wl^en  thoughtful    igo6 


specimens  ol   Types  in   Use  169 


THIRTY     POrNT 


When  thought  1906 


TH  I  RTY-SI  X     POI  NT 


When  tho  igod 

\A/HITTIER 

SIX    POI  NT 

NO.  I 
WHEN   THOUGHTFUL  CREEKS    LIKE   POLYBIUS   SAW  THE   FALL  OF   CAR     123456  78  90 

NO.  2 
THE    FIRST   TIME    THAT    THE    GRAND    PROSPECT    HAD    BEEN     HELD    1905 

NO.  3 
THE    FIRST   TIME   THAT   THE   GRAND    PROSPECT     HAD     BEE    1906 

NO.  4 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  1906 

TWELVE    POINT 
NO.   I 

THE    FIRST    TIME    THAT    THE    GRAND    1906 

NO.  2 

THE    FIRST   TIME   THAT   THE   1906 

NO.  3 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH  1906 

NO.  4 

TH  E  Fl  RST  TI  M  E  TH  1906 

EIGHTEEN    POI  NT 
NO.   I 

THE  FIRST  TIM  1906 

NO.  2 

THE  FIRST  T  1906 


lyo  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


ENGRAVER'S  BOLD 


SIX   POI  NT 

NO.  I 
THE  FIRST  TI>IB  THAT  THB  ORANO  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HEL.I>  FORTH    TO    THE    M'OR    ISOa 

NO.  2 
THE   FIRST  Tl^fE   THAT   THE   GRAND   PROSPECT   HAD   BEEN    HELD    FORTH    TO    leOB 

NO.  3 
THB  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA-ND  PROSPECT  HAD  BKIEN  HELD   1906 

NO.  4 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA  1906 

NO.  5 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS  1906 

TWELVE    POI  NT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  1906 


COIVEMIISRCIAIL. 

SIX    POINT 

NO.  I 
THE  FIRST  TIMS  THAT  THB  GRAND  PROSPECT    HAZ>    BEEN    BEr.I>    FORTH    TO    THE    WOR    1S06 

NO.  2 
THE    FIRST   TIMS   THAT  THBJ    GRAND    PROSPKOT  HAD  BKBN    IQOB 

NO.  3 
THE  FIRST  TIlVtE  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPEC   1906 

NO.  4 

THK  jniRST  XIMIE  THAT  THIG  GRAND  P»R  1906 

EIGHT    POI  NT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA  1906 

TEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIM:E  THAT  1906 

TWELVE    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME   1906 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  171 

DELLA  ROBBIA 

SIX     POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they   1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  1906 
THE  FIPvST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN 

TEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  1906 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

TWELVE    POINT 

\A/hen  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PK 

FOURTEEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly  hi  1906 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G 


EIGHTEEN     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  li  1906 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gre  19 

THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


172  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


DELLA  ROBBIA 

THIRTY    POINT 

When  thoughtful  1 9 

THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-SIX     POINT 


When  though  1 9 

THE  FIRST  TI 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


When  tho  1 9 

THE  FIRST 


SIX     POINT     BLACK     NO.    13 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corint  1906 
THE    FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  HAD   BEEN   HELD  FORTH  TO 


TWELVE    POINT    OLD    ENGLISH 


FOURTEEN     POINT    CADET 


specimens  oj   Types   in   Use  173 

JENSON  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT     POI  N  T 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD 

TEN      POI  N  T 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 


TWELVE    POI  NT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  J906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND 


EIGHTEEN     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  J  906 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greek  19 

THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


THIRTY-SrX     POINT 


When  thoughtf  1 9 

THE  FIRST  TI 


174  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

JENSON  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

SIX     POINT 

When  thoaghtfal  Greeks  like  Pohbius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  the  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  T 

EIGHT    POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa<w  the  fall  of  Carthag  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 

TEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  tike  Polybius  sam)  the  fall  of  1 906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  "PROSPEC 

TWELVE    POI  NT 

When  thoaghtfal  Greeks  like  T'olybius  sa  J  906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  19 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 


THIRTY     POINT 


When  thoaghtfal  G 19 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  175 


TH  I  RTY-SIX     POI  NT 


When  thought fu  19 

THE  FIRST  TIM 

OLD  STYLE  EXTENDED 

TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 

When  though  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


TH  I  RTY-Srx    POI  NT 


When  tho  19 
THE  FIRST  T 


FORTY-EIGHT     POINT 


When   19 
THE   FIR 


176  The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 

BOLD-FACE  ITALIC 

SIX     POINT 

When  thottghtful  Greeks  like  JPolybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  a  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN 

NINE    POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Ch'eeks  like  Polybiiis  satv  the  f  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 


INTERCHANGEABLE  GOTHIC 

SIX    POINT 
NO.  I 

THE    FIRST    TIME    THAT    THE    GRAND    PROSPECT    HAD    BEEN    HELD    FORTH    TO    THE    WOR     1«0« 

NO.  2 

THE    FIRST  TIME   THAT  THE   GRAND    PROSPECT   HAD   BEEN    HELD    FORTH   TO  T    1906 

NO.  3 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  F    1906 

NO.  4 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  1906 

NO.  5 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT   1906 

EIGHT    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO  1906 

TEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  1906 

TWELVE    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  1906 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

THE  FIRSTTIIVI1906 

TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 

THE  FIRST  19 


specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  I'jy 

GOTHIC  CONDENSED 

SI  X      POI  N  T 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  th  1 906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN   HELD  FORTH  TO  T 

EIGHT     POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD   BEEN   HE 

TEN     POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greei(s  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD 


TWELVE     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  1 906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 


EIGHTEEN     POI  N  T 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  P  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 


TWENTY-TWO     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  1 906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 


LIGHT-FACE  GOTHIC 

SIX     POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of   Corinth,  they  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD    BEEN    HELD    FORTH  TO 

EIGHT     POI  N  T 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage    1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD    BEEN    HE 


178  The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 


LINING  GOTHIC  CONDENSED 

SIX     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WORLD  1906 

EIGHT    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WORLD  1906 

TEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  1906 

TWELVE    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HE  1906 

FOURTEEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THATTHE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  1906 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSP  1906 

TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  6RA  1 906 


THIRTY     POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  1906 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  TH  1906 


FORTY-TWO     POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  1906 


specimens  of   Types  in  Use  179 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


THE  FIRST  Tl  1906 


SIXTY     POINT 


THE  FIRST  1906 


SEVENTY-TWO     POINT 


THE  FIR  1906 


CLARENDON 

SIX     POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HEL 

NINE    POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA 

SEVEN     POINT    FIGURES 

1234567890 


i8o  The   University  o  j  Chicago  Press 

SLOPING  GOTHIC 

SIX    POINT   (agate    face) 
TH£   FiaST   TIME    THAT   THE   QRAND   PROSPECT  HAD   BE 

SIX     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth.  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD   FORTH   TO   THE 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthag  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  HAD   BEEN  HELD  F 

TEN     POI  NT 

Wher)  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN 

TWELVE    POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA 


LiaHT-FACE 

SIX    POI  NT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAITD  PROSPECT  HAD  BE  1906 

EIGHT     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIxME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSP  1906 

NINE    POI  NT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  1906 

TEN     POI NT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  1906 

TWEUVE    POI  NT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T  1906 


Specimens  oj   Types  in   Use  i8i 

PONTIAC 

SIX     POINT 

When  thouflhtful  Greeks  like  Polyblus  saw  the  fail  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WORLD 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fail  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth.  1906 
THE  fIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE 

TEN     POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  o  1 906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 


FOURTEEN     POINT 


Wlien  tlioujiitful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA 


EIGHTEEN     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  1 906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 


TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  1 906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 


i82  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

PONTIAC 

THIRTY    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  19 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE 


THIRTY-SIX     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gre  19 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


OLD  STYLE  ANTIQUE 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HE 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Cart  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT   THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  H 


TEN     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 


TWELVE    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  1906 
THE    FIRST  TIME   THAT  THE   GRA 


EIGHTEEN     POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  1906 
THE    FIRST  TIME    THAT 


specimens  of  Types  in   Use  183 

POST  OLD  STYLE 

SIX     POINT 

'WHen  tHou^Htft&l  GreeKs  like  Polybius  saw  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 

EIGHT     POINT 

\^Ken  tKoug'Htftil  GreeKs  liKe  Polybi  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIMB  THAT  THB  GRAND  PR 

TEN     POI  NT 

V^hen  tl\otigl\tf\il  GreeKs  liKe  1900 

the:  first  time  that  the  gr 

TWELVE    POI  NT 

WKen  tHoughtful  Greeks  li  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G 


EIGHTEEN     POINT 


When  thoug'htfu  I906 
THE  FIR^ST  TIME  TH 


TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 


When  thoug'htf  19 
THE  FIR5T  TIM 


THIRTY-SIX     POINT 


When  tho  19 
THE  FIR»ST 


184  The  University  of  Chicago  Press 

GUSHING  OLD  STYLE 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Cori  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORT 

-  SEVEN     POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthag  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN 

NINE    POI  NT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthag  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD    BEE 

TEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Ca  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT   HAD 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  th  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND    PROSPE 

FOURTEEN     POINT    NO.    I 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  P 

FOURTEEN     POINT    NO.   2 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Po  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 


specimens  of   Types  in   Use  185 

GUSHING  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gr  19 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


THIRTY-SIX     POINT 


When  though  19 

THE  FIRST  TI 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


When  tho  19 
THE  FIRST 


i86  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 

DE  VINNE 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FO 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

TEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  1906 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybi  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greek  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 


When  thoughtful  190 
THE   FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY    POI  NT 


When  thought  19 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


specimens  o  j   Types  in   Use  187 


THIRTY-SIX   POINT 


When  thou  19 
THE  FIRST  T 


FORTY-TWO   POINT 


When  tho  19 
THE  FIRST 


SIXTY    POI  NT 


When  19 
THE   PI 


i88  The   University  oj  Chicago  Press 


SEVENTY-TWO    POINT 


Wheip 
THE 

Wh 
TAIR 


specimens  of  Types  in  Use 


189 


NINETY-SIX     POINT 


lolin 
HIM 


ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENTY    POINT 


igo  The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


CONDENSED  DE  VINNE 

SEVENTY-TWO    POINT 

When  li 


NINETY-SIX    POINT 


The 


ON  E-H  U  N  DRED-AN  D  TWENTY    POINT 


Thcl 


specimens  oj  Types  in  Use  191 

REMINGTON  TYPEWRITER 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly- 
bius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory* There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hither- 
to at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population, 
in  government,  in  language,  in  1906 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS? 

E'EW  MODEL  REMmGTOl^  TYPEWRITER 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly- 
bius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory. There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations 
hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war, 
distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts 
in  population,  in  government,  1906 

THE  EIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 


192 


The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


ORNAMENTS 


il^^v^Mi 


5 


specimens  o  j  Types  in   Use 


193 


ORNAMENTS 


9 


10 


11 


W 


12 


13 


14 


194  The  University  of  Chicago  Press 


ORNAMENTS 


specimens  of   Types  in   Use 


195 


ORNAMENTS 


49 


196 


The   University  of  Chicago  Press 


ORNAMENTS 


%^^^^^ 

ii.«'i  ^^^ 


« 


52 


53 


57 


58 


59 


sped  7n  ens  of  Types  in  Use 


197 


INITIALS 


Wf^Sfi 

^M 

Ijij^^^S 

^ 

1^^ 

■jSvfc 

^3 

s 

iwi^?^^ 

TTvj' 

|il^ 

s 

198 


The  University  0}  Chicago  Press 


INITIALS 


^ 

■_^     ■ 

8 


11 


12 


18 


specimens  o  j  Types  in  Use 


199 


BORDERS 


Six  Point  No*  1 
Six  Point  No.  2 


Six  Point  No.  3 


Six  Point  No.  4 


Ten  Point  No.  1 
Twelve  Point  No.  1 
Twelve  Point  No.  2 
Twelve  Point  No.  8 


Twelve  Point  No.  4 


200  The  University  o j  Chicago  Press 

BORDERS 

JJPm  »♦«  »*iT«  »Tr«  »*^«  »T«  /P«  »T«  »'T»  /r«  »*^«  »*P«  »*!r«  «T«  >T«  t*!*!  tT*  »*t*«  »*!?«  »*i*«  >*t*« 

"X  *1*  *iTi    X    A    tTi*  vP  ji    tij    X    X    iT'    «i»  ^C    X  ^i    A    it    X    X  \F 

Twelve  Point  No.  5 


^  Twelve  Point  No.  6 


Twelve  Point  No.  7 


moAVO(p^ffio)orado^Q)^ra5)o(bS^ 


Twelve  Point  No.  8 


m 


Twenty-four  Point  No.  1 


Twenty-four  Point  No.  2 


Thirty-six  Point  No.  1 


Double  Eule  Border 


Triple  Rule  Border 


specimens  of   Types   in   Use 


lOl 


INDEX  TO  TYPES 


PAGE 

Antique  Greek 154 

Arabic 155 

Black 172 

Body  Type: 

Modem 125-29 

Old  Style 130-38 

Monotype 139-44 

Linotype 145-48 

Caslon 149-52 

Bold-Face  Italic 176 

Borders i99i  200 

Bradley  Text 167,  168 

Cadet 172 

Caslon  Old  Style 149-52,  157.  158 

Caslon  Old  Style  Italic 158 

Century  Expanded 161 

Clarendon 179 

Commercial 170 

Condensed  De  Mnne 190 

Condensed  Old  Style 163,  164 

Cushing  Old  Style 184,  185 

Delia  Robbia 171,  172 

De  Vinne 186-89 

Condensed 190 

Engraver's  Bold 170 

Engraver's  Old  English 165 

Ethiopic 155 

French  Old  Style 162,  163 

Gothic  Condensed 177 

Greek: 

Porson 153 

-    Antique 154 

Inscription 154 


PAGE 

Hebrew 154 

Initials 197,  198 

Inscription  Greek 154 

Interchangeable  Gothic 176 

Jenson  Old  Style 173 

Jenson  Old  Style  Italic 174,  175 

Light-Face 180 

Light-Face  Gothic 177 

Lining  Gothic  Condensed 178,  179 

Linotype  Type 145-48 

Miscellaneous  Signs 156 

Modem  Body  Type 125-29 

Monotype  Type 139-44 

Nestorian  Syriac 155 

New  Model  Remington  Typewriter. ...  191 

Old  English 172 

Old  Style  Antique 182 

Old  Style  Body  Type 130-38,  159 

Old  Style  Extended 175 

Old  Style  ItaHc 130-38,  160, 

Ornaments 192-98 

Pontiac 181,  182 

Porson  Greek 153 

Post  Old  Style 183 

Priory  Text 166 

Remington  Typewriter 191 

New  Model 191 

Sloping  Gothic 180 

Syriac,  Nestorian 155 

Touraine  Old  Style 168.  169 

Tudor  Black 167 

Whittier 169 


specimens   of    Types   i  n   Use  [Supplement  No.  i 


TITLE 

NINE   POI  NT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR  1906 

ELEVEN    POi  NT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  1906 

TWELVE    POI  NT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  1906 


FOURTEEN    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  190G 


SIXTEEN     POI  NT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  TH  1906 


EIGHTEEN    POI  NT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  T  1906 


TWENTY    POI  NT 


THE  FIRST  TIM  1906 


TV/ENTY-TWO    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIM  1906 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


THE  FIRST  T  1 906 


A 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
BIdg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made 
4  days  prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 
SENT  on  ILL 


NOV  0  9  2004 


U.  C.  BERKELEY 


DD20  1M  3-02 


« ^  tjt^.lfd 


HlM.m.^".!^^'-^^    LIBRARIES 


C03D7T3m5 


X 


/ 

/ 


/Z'^ 


-i^--.  '-fit 


234226 


< 


•  \. 


L, -•s.    v^' 


-ejpa  ^  *'«^' 


